JP6986276B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of imparting a gaming value to a player when the result of a variable display game is a special result.

In the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of both the first variable display game (for example, the special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (for example, the special figure 2 variable display game) are being executed. There is a (so-called simultaneous variable machine). In such a gaming machine, variation patterns of the first variation display game and the second variation display game are set according to the total number of executions of the first variation display game and the second variation display game (for example, Patent Documents). 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-6264

However, in the method using the total number of executions, the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is inflexible, and one of the variable display games is collectively played for a long time in the normal gaming state. There was a possibility that an unmanned jackpot would occur in which one of the variable display games would be a jackpot (special game state) in an unmanned state.

An object of the present invention is to reduce the possibility that a special gaming state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed on a display device based on the establishment of a start condition is provided, and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. In a game machine capable of generating a special game state capable of imparting a game value to a player, the game control means first controls execution of a first variable display game based on the establishment of a first start condition. The first variable display game and the second variable display game by the first control means are provided with a control means and a second control means for controlling execution of the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition. It is possible to put the second variable display game by the control means into a running state, and after the special gaming state, the first gaming state and the second starting condition rather than the first starting condition. is but can generate a second game condition to be easily obtained, and is capable of generating said first gaming state after the second game state, said first control means is in the first game condition, the The effect mode of the first variable display game can be set according to the number of times the first variable display game is executed after the transition to the first game state , and the second control means is the first game state. configurable der the effect mode of the second variable display game in accordance with the execution frequency of the second variable display game after the transition to the first game condition is, in the first game condition, transition to the first game status When the number of executions of the second variable display game later exceeds a predetermined number of times, the variable time of the second variable display game is set to a predetermined time, and the second variable display after the transition to the first gaming state is performed. when number of times of execution of the game within the predetermined number of times, to set the variation time of the second variable display games in a short fluctuation time than the predetermined time.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a special gaming state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the effect control system of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring processing. Special Figure 2 It is a time chart explaining an abnormality fluctuation monitoring process. Special Figure 2 Another time chart for explaining the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. Special Figure 2 It is yet another time chart for explaining the abnormal change monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start port 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a missed probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 bytes distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change process transition setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing the residual ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fixed number signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 game processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation resumption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the design system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the fluctuation interruption setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation resumption setting process. It is a time chart (timing chart) showing how the variable display game is forcibly terminated. It is a time chart showing how to suspend / resume the variable display game. (A) It is a time chart which shows the case where the variation time timer of the special figure 2 variation display game is updated when the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped. (B) It is a time chart which shows the case of not updating. (A) Special Figure 1 This is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of a variable display game is not set. (B) Special Figure 2 It is a time chart showing how to set a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of a variable display game. (A) This is a time chart showing how to set the delay timer (wait time) of the special figure 2 variable display game regardless of the state of the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game. (B) Special Figure 1 This is a time chart showing a state in which a delay timer (wait time) for delaying the restart of a variable display game is not set. It is a time chart which shows the processing when there is a possibility that a special figure 1 variable display game and a special figure 2 variable display game end at the same timing. It is a time chart showing an example of processing when there is a power failure during the interruption of the variable display game and the power failure is restored (power is turned on) after that. It is a time chart showing another example of processing when there is a power failure during the interruption of the variable display game and then the power failure is restored (power is turned on). It is a front view of the gaming board provided in the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, the loss probability, and the probability change probability in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time saving variation number update process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process in the second embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 big hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing while displaying a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Pyramid residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a time chart of the operation of the 1st special variable winning device in a small hit RUSH. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure for normal processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 display process (the latter half part) which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 effect mode information check processing according to a third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 display process (the latter half part) which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 effect mode information check processing according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of the display device at the time of changing from the small hit RUSH mode of a probable change state to a normal mode through a special mode. It is a figure which illustrates the game state transition diagram (game flow) which shows the transition of the game state in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 effect mode information check processing according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 effect mode information check processing according to a modification of the third embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a 1st flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the 2nd flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time which concerns on the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the transition of the screen of the display device at the time of changing from the time saving state (time saving mode) to the normal mode through the special mode in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[First Embodiment]
[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

At the bottom of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed by the player operating the effect operation device not only during the execution of the variable display game but also during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state, high probability state), or a big hit state in a variable display game. (Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability fall lottery. There are things that continue until you win (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball punching hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variable display (variable display) of a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 is provided with a warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. Has been done. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning opening 36 or the first. It is easy to win a prize in the 2 start winning opening 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

A first start winning opening (first starting winning area, special drawing 1 starting opening, starting opening 1) 36 to which a starting condition (starting condition) of a special figure variation display game is given to the game area 32 below the center case 40. Is provided. When hitting to the left (normal hitting), the game ball is likely to win (win) in the first starting winning opening 36. A second start winning opening (second starting winning area, special drawing 2 starting opening, starting opening 2) 37 is provided in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. When hitting to the right, the game ball is likely to win (win) in the second starting winning opening 37. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

In the game area 32 below the second start winning opening 37, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side to open the lower large winning opening. A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball in the large winning opening.

Further, in the game area 32 on the upper left side of the center case 40, an attacker type that opens the upper prize opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of tilting toward the front side by the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. Similar to the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game (player). By converting it into a game state that is advantageous to the player and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the upper prize opening, an upper prize opening switch 39a (see FIG. 3) (two in this embodiment) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball in the large winning opening.

A game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the lower large winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper large winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39. Then, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2) A batch display device 50 for executing the game)) is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units D1 to D20 for displaying information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) (lamp D1) and a second special figure for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. It has a variable display unit 52 (special figure 2 display) (lamp D2). Further, the batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 53 (ramp D3-D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and a special figure 1 variable display. It has a storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold display) (lamps D11-D14) for notifying the start (hold) number of games.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit 55 (first game state display, probability state display unit) (lamps D15-D18) that displays that the winning probability state is a high probability state. ), The second game state display unit 56 (second game state display) (lamp D8-D10) that lights up when a big hit or a small hit occurs and notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed). It is provided. Further, the batch display device 50 has a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted corresponding to the modification described later. It may have a device, a suspension state display unit) (lamps D19, D20).

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the special figure variation display game will be described. In this embodiment, the normal map start gate is not provided, and the so-called normal map variation display game is not executed. Further, the second start winning opening 37 is not provided with a movable member for opening and closing the second starting winning opening 37.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, and the second The starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out opening 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of winning opening is changed. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 via the payout device.

As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player starts the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting the left to win the game ball in the first start winning opening 36, and the small hit / big hit, the probability change state, etc. When the game occurs, the player switches to right-handed and aims at the second start winning opening 37 and the large winning opening. The display device 41 can display an instruction indicating whether the player should hit left or right, and if the player does not follow the instruction, the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b notify the error. It is possible.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), and is stored in the second starting winning opening. The game ball winning the prize 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (1 in the present embodiment).

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted. These random values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for a predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game) at the maximum. It is stored up to 4 times). The stored number of the special figure 1 start winning memory (special figure 1 start winning memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variation display game can be in the execution state (running) at the same time independently of the special figure 1 variation display game, and further, the special figure 2 variation can be set. The special figure 2 start prize is invalidated during the display game execution, the big hit, etc. (the detection of the start port 2 switch 37a is invalidated). Therefore, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special drawing 2 starting winning memory) is not substantially accumulated, and the special drawing 2 variable display game starts as soon as the special drawing 2 starting winning memory is generated. That is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not played at the timing when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the variable start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game is satisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory number is not displayed on the batch display device 50 or the display device 41. It is also possible to display the number of winning prizes stored in the special figure 2 on the batch display device 50 or the display device 41.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the second start winning opening 37 or the second start memory. do.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification information (special symbol 1 (special figure 1), special symbol 2 (special figure 2)) is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other, but one of the special figure variable display games has a big hit or a small hit. If it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed as a stop), the other running special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result.

When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts to fluctuate, but basically a long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes) occurs. Since it is performed, it will be forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, and the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random value at the time of winning is the jackpot value), the special figure variation display game. As a result of the above, a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 is energized by energizing the lower prize opening solenoid (38b) and / or the upper winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). , The big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege of being able to acquire it is given.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display. As a result of the game, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 is a large winning opening by energizing the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and / or the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less). Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be referred to as the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be referred to as the second special gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits are frequently generated by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of short fluctuation with a short fluctuation time and many prize balls due to the small hits are obtained. Become. Then, in the small hit rush, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 will be opened at a high frequency.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38 and / or second special variable winning device 39) is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

In the present embodiment, all types of jackpots shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot state ends, and the probabilistic change state continues until the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the jackpot ends. .. That is, the gaming machine 10 is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic symbol. On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state), the game returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. Although the jackpot probability is low in the jackpot state, the jackpot probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained in the small hit state (the probability state does not change in the small hit state). Therefore, the jackpot probability is maintained at a high probability (probability variation state) throughout the small hit RUSH state.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are configured as separate displays, and each special figure variation display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state), but on the other hand. If a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (a special result or a specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure fluctuation display game being executed is forcibly missed. Stop.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state), but one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be executed. When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed as a stop), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a missed result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. Has been done. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. A micro switch having a specific contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the DC32V voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. It will be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects in which the possibility that a special result mode is derived (the degree of expectation is different) is different, normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach). , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The degree of expectation of the effect (notice) suggests the probability of becoming a big hit when the effect is selected, the selection rate of the effect when it is a big hit, and the effect of the effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selection rate and the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including the execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach). It is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ..

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the variation pattern tables from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and the inside of the second starting winning opening 37. The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39 are connected and supplied from these switches. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a are the third input port 124. Is entered in.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12, and the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the overflow switch signal and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (lower large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (upper large winning opening) that opens the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of the solenoid) 39b is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the lower prize-winning port solenoid 38b and the upper prize-winning port solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fourth that outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU (production control program) and a PRO (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and power in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can hold stored contents at least, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, control circuit 332-334 (IORESET) that drives and controls lamps, motors, etc., as output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

The starting prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

In addition, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning opening 37, and based on the start memory, the special figure 2 variation display game jackpot determination disorder. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and displays a special game state (big hit). State) is generated. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or the second special variable winning device 39 is movable by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

Then, whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until any of the conditions is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of becoming a hit result (big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, a high probability state is established based on the result mode of either the special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game). Even so, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is controlled to be shortened. In the present embodiment, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate each independently and generate only one of them.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6 performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***" or "S ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). A subordinate control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that is a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program starts normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is surely performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the waiting time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (for example, twice). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A10008. Judgment (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011). It is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output (set to no output) to all output ports (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier whether or not the initialization switch is turned on (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). , It is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process of normally recovering (recovering) from the power failure is executed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is “Y”) (the result of A1017 is “N”). Or, if the result of A1018 is "N") and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1023 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The area to be initialized is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is changed. It is an indefinite state indicating that it is not fixed.

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. The commands at the time of power failure recovery include a model specification command indicating the type of game machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of holds in special figure 1, a probability information command indicating the probability status, a screen specification command, and the like. .. The screen designation command is a command for designating the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally being processed (when neither variable nor hit operation is in progress). Is a command for a demo waiting for customers, otherwise it is a command for the recovery screen.

Further, in the command at the time of power failure recovery, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (backed up by RWM) as in the modified example of FIGS. 63 to 69B described later. (When there is a special figure game interruption flag) includes a suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. good.

On the other hand, when the process of step A1023 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1023). Further, all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. The command at the time of RAM initialization includes a model specification command, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. In response to the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. Do (eg 30 seconds).

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further include an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time saving state. Includes a time saving information command that indicates the number of games remaining in.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). Random numbers 1 and jackpot symbol random numbers 2)) are saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1030) as initial values (start values), and interrupts are permitted (A1031). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output having the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing).

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1033), and sets the number of times to check the power failure monitoring. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process in step A1032. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1032) (A1031), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is initially executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by making it stand by by the value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1032, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. Judgment (A1035). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "N"), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1036) and output off-data to all output ports (A1037).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) is executed (A1304). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1305) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1306) and random number update. Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring the error. (A1308), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A1309). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for processing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1311). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game display and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1312).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1313). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1314).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1315). The details of the external information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing process. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper prize opening switches 39a (two) in the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described later in FIG.

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and fraud Information on the upper limit of the number of winnings (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the winning opening monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, information on the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined in the winning opening monitoring table. These fraud monitoring tables and winning slot monitoring tables are prepared according to each of the switches to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower grand prize opening switch 38a in the lower grand winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize (A2005). ), The winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process (A2007). In the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number) is counted as the abnormal fluctuation number in the normal gaming state (when the probability is low), and the abnormal fluctuation number is the specified value (the abnormal fluctuation number). For example, when 5) is reached, the effect control device 300 is made to execute the error notification. The details of the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating a plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010). The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection etc. (switch error) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set. Monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is "N"), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2013 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the game machine status monitoring table 3 (A2014), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2015).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processes from steps A2014 to A2016 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes from A2014 to A2016 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The fraud & winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002 and A2004 in the winning port switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the lower large winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39. As for the large prize opening (special variable prize devices 38 and 39), fraud is likely to be performed by forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting the game ball and paying out the prize ball, so fraud is monitored in addition to detecting the prize. ..

First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (A2102). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower large winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the upper large winning opening switch 39a.

Then, when the fraud monitoring period is reached (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of target illegal winnings is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is determined to be the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is (for example, 5) or more (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5, for example, is that when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the case where a prize is won or the case where noise is added to the signal to be judged as illegal, and to prevent it from being easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number is not more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winning determinations (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a target fraud occurrence command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent prize occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the winning number of winning balls. The counter update process is executed (A2111). The details of the winning number counter update process will be described later in FIG.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the update of the notification timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is one of the upper winning opening switches 39a, and is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the other upper winning opening switch 39a. Not done. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the second special variable winning device 39, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). .. When the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been timed up, the target illegal release command is prepared (A2116), and the invalid flag is set. Prepare the fraudulent prize cancellation flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

The game control device 100 is at the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of fraudulent prizes (A2119).

Further, the game control device 100 is not the moment after the processing of step A2119 is completed or the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), that is, the fraud & winning monitoring processing before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in, the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (A2120).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (A2121), and the command setting process is performed. Is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fraud occurs, and the fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fraud is canceled, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter update process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the number of winning slot switches to be monitored from the winning slot monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning slot switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches is completed (A2212).

On the other hand, when the target winning opening switch has an input (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and loads the loaded value. Update +1 (A2204). Further, it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs depending on the updated value (A2205).

When the overflow has not occurred (the result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs depending on the updated value (A2209). If overflow does not occur (the result of A2209 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2212 is "Y"), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the production serial transmission buffer (A2301). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2302).

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2302 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2303).

When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2302 is "Y"), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2301.

Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the serial transmission buffer for effect (A2304) and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A2305). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A2305 is "Y"), the process returns to step A2304.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A2305 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A2306), and then sets the effect command. End the process.

As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal change monitoring processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process. Special figure 2 The abnormality change monitoring process is executed in step A2007 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a state where the hit probability is low (including a normal gaming state). If the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402), and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by +1 (. Add only 1) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation number is equal to or more than the specified value (the result of A2404 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not 0 (A2405). , Special figure 1 Clear the number of fluctuations to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation check flag is set (A2407). If the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2410. As will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a state where the hit probability is low (including a normal gaming state).

When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (A2408), and updates the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number by +1. (A2409). After that, it is determined whether or not the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 5) (A2410).

When the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “N”), the game control device 100 subtracts 1 from the specified value used for the determination in step A2410. (A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer as an error notification timer (A2412), and a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal change is prepared (A2412). A2413), a special figure 2 abnormality change occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419.

When the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer by -1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time is not up (the result of A2416 is "N"), the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process is terminated.

When the time is up (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (A2417), and prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release command as an effect command (A2418). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the value in the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is “Y”), the special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring process is terminated.

When the prepared flag is different from the value in the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (the result of A2419 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. (A2420). If the prepared flag is not a release flag (the result of A2420 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 to 0 (A2421). That is, when the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag is prepared in the state where the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is set in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A2417), the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared to 0. do. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag in the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area is rewritten to the prepared flag. Next, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2423), and the special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal change (the abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 change display game) is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, the external information editing process described later will be performed. Outputs a security signal as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the effect control device 300 receives the special figure 2 abnormality change generation command as an effect command, the effect control device 300 executes error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the normal game state (the jackpot probability is low), the player usually aims to win the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, but the second starting winning opening 37 is more than the winning to the first starting winning opening 36. When the winning prize is more advantageous to the player (when the probability of a small hit is high), the player may aim at the second starting winning opening 37 by hitting right. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed by winning the second start winning opening 37, and an error is notified to the player in order to stop the right-handed hit. In the normal game state, when left-handed is performed, the process is performed by the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 11, and the special figure 2 abnormality change occurrence command (that is, error notification) is not generated. FIG. 2 The abnormality change notification timer does not start either.

The special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process will be further described with reference to the time chart of FIGS. 12A-12C. 12A-12C exemplify the result of the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed a plurality of times in the normal gaming state (the hit probability is low) and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value (here, 5) (A2410). The result is "N"), the initial value (60 seconds) of the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer and the special figure 2 abnormality change occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the effect of receiving the special figure 2 abnormality change occurrence command. The control device 300 can start the error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

After that, since the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (5 in this case) (A2411), unless the special Figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set again, the next special Figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process will be performed. Special figure 2 The abnormal fluctuation notification timer is continuously updated by -1 and can be timed (the result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer times out and the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is received after the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value. The prize balls are paid out even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, and the occurrence of an error can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer. The machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process described later).

When the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value (5 in this case) again during the timing of the abnormal change notification timer in Special Figure 2 (during error notification), the initial value of the abnormal change notification timer in Special Figure 2 is set again. It is set, and error notification for 60 seconds can be started from there (timer reset). In addition, when a big hit occurs (starts), a special figure 2 abnormal change release command is transmitted, and the special figure 2 abnormal change number, the special figure 2 abnormal change notification timer, and the special figure 1 change number are cleared to 0 (special figure display described later). Medium processing, fanfare / interval processing Transition setting processing).

Further, in FIG. 11, the fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure fluctuation display game starts in a low probability state, but the fluctuation check flag has won a prize in the start winning opening in a low probability state. Control may be performed as set in the case. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12B, control is performed using the number of winnings instead of the number of fluctuations, and in the normal gaming state, the second starting winning opening 37 is won multiple times (special figure 2 winning). FIG. 2 When the number of abnormal winnings reaches the specified value (here, 5), error notification can be started.

Further, in the control of FIG. 11, as shown in FIG. 12A, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to 0 after the error notification by the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is completed (A2421), but as shown in FIG. 12B, the special figure 2 is specified. FIG. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations (number of abnormal winnings) may be maintained at a specified value.

In FIG. 12C, when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is updated by -1 and decreases from 4 to 3, for example. (A2405) shows a situation in which the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 (A2406). In this way, in the normal game state (when the hit probability is low), even if the special figure 2 variation display game is executed multiple times by right-handed and the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations increases, the player is left-handed. When it is returned (stop right-handed) and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 decreases and error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed in steps A2010, A2012, and A2015 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 according to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2502). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2502 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-type signal, and indicates a non-touch state for a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the state on flag as the state flag (A2506), acquires the target state on command, and prepares. (A2507). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for an error-type signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the updated status monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and the timer comparison value-. Keep the value at 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (A2515). If they match (the result of A2515 is "Y"), the gaming machine status check process ends.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2517), and the gaming machine status check process is completed. The effect command here is either a state-off command or a state-on command. If the state-on command is an error-type command, the effect control device 300 is started to notify the error.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting opening prize (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a low probability state when there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y") (A2704). .. Then, in the case of a low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A2707.

When the probability of hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (when the probability is high) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705), and produces an effect. The command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handedness on the display device 41 as a warning when the first starter winning opening 36 has a starter opening prize in a high probability state. can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting information on holding by winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special drawing starting opening 1 switch process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table (A2709) for monitoring the winning of the second starting winning opening (starting port 2) 37, and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (that is, a probable change state) when there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening 37 (the result of A2711 is "Y"). Judgment (A2712). When it is not a high probability state (when it is a low probability state) (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot state (A2713). When it is not in the jackpot state (the result of A2713 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (A2714). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag set in the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process described later.

Here, the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation) is the final special-figure fluctuation display game when the special-figure fluctuation display game starts in a high-probability state, and is, for example, ST (special time). This is the final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for the start of fluctuations a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A2714 is "N"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2715), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2716). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the left-handed instruction display for instructing left-handed on the display device 41 as a warning when there is a start-up winning on the second starting winning opening 37 during the normal gaming state. Can be done.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2717) for setting the information of holding by winning the second start winning opening 37 (starting opening 2), and executes the special figure starting opening 2 switch process (A2718). ), End the start port switch monitoring process. The game control device 100 is in a high-probability state (result of A2712 is “Y”), in a jackpot state (result of A2713 is “Y”), and in a high-probability final fluctuation (result of A2714). Is "Y"), the processing of steps A2717 and A2718 is executed without preparing the left-handed instruction notification command.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special start port 1 switch process (A2708) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 1 switch processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the start port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 1 switch 36a is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 (A2901). Further, the value of the number of output times of the loaded start port 1 signal is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (A2903).

If the output count does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the RWM start port 1 signal output count region (A2904). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is terminated.

When the number of reserved special figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the number of reserved special figures 1 by +1. (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the reserved number in Special Figure 1 (A2908), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A2909). ). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (. A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure hold information determination process (pre-reading process, advance determination process) for determining the special figure hold information (A2914), and the decorative special figure 1 hold number indicating the special figure 1 hold number. The command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), the effect command setting process is executed (A2916), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. The details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch processing.

The number of times the start port 2 signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the start port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (A3001). Moreover,
The value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the output count does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the RWM start port 2 signal output count region (A3004). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid, that is, the detection of the starting opening 2 switch 37a is invalid (A3005). It should be noted that the big hit fluctuation / small hit fluctuation is stopped (during processing while displaying the special figure described later), the big hit state (from the stop of the big hit fluctuation to the large hit end processing described later), and the small hit state (from the stop of the small hit fluctuation). (Until the small hit end process described later), if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (changing), the second start is started even if the game ball enters the second start winning opening 37. It is treated as if there was no prize in the prize opening 37 and is invalidated. When the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is invalid (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the special drawing starting opening 2 switch process.

On the other hand, when the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalid (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 hold number to 1 (A3006). In addition, although the special figure 2 variation display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, the special figure 2 hold number is set to 1 due to the necessity of control. Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 start storage (A3007), and saves the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A3008). ..

Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (A3009), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3010). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (A3012), and the special figure start port is set. 2 End the switch processing.

As described above, since the special figure 2 variation display game is started as soon as the special figure 2 start memory is generated, the special figure start port 2 switch process is different from the special figure start port 1 switch process. , The special figure hold information determination process (look-ahead process, pre-determination process) is not performed, and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is not prepared.

As described above, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, and the variable display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores up to a predetermined number of starting storage that is the execution right. Further, the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 in the first start storage (for example, 4) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Various random value values stored as special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 start winning memory) and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37 are stored up to a predetermined number (here, 1). 2 Stored as start-up memory (special figure 2 start-up memory, special figure 2 start-winning memory).

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2914) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process (look-ahead process, advance determination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed only for the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (that is, a probabilistic state) (A3101). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress (A3102). When the jackpot state is not in progress (the result of A3102 is "N"), the jackpot determination process is executed based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

In addition, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3101 is "Y") or in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process does not perform the jackpot determination process or the like. It ends as it is (preliminary judgment (look-ahead) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), the big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111. Move to the processing of.

When the judgment result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (in the case of a miss) (the result of A3104 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs the small hit determination process based on the big hit random value stored as the first start memory. It is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for determining a small hit.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hit (A3109), and the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). The result of is "N"), and the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes the effect command setting process (A3112). Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Subsequently, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3203). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3204 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is assigned to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3207).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3207, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game and the effect setting. In addition, special figure 1 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3208). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG. 21.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1. Special Figure 1 Performing variable processing is executed (A3209). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A3207, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and each The special figure 1 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A3210). The details of the processing during display of Special Figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3211). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later in FIG. 47.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3212), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. The details of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening will be described later in FIG. 49.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A3213). The details of the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening will be described later in FIG. 51.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3214), the special figure 1 big hit end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit middle processing, and the like. (A3215). The details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later in FIG. 55.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small amount of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3216). The details of the small hit medium processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and a special figure 1 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for this is executed (A3217). The details of the small hit residual ball treatment will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3218), the special figure 1 small hit end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 58.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1311) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3301). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3303). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3304 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A3322.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuations and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the fluctuation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3303-A3307. A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3310).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3310, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the effect setting. In addition, special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3311). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG. 22.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2. Special Figure 2 Performing variable processing is executed (A3312). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A3310, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and each The special figure 2 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A3313). The details of the process during display of Special Figure 2 will be described later in FIG. 44.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3314). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later in FIG. 47.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3315), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. It should be noted that the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later in FIG. 49.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A3316). It should be noted that the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later in FIG. 51.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (the special figure 2 jackpot end process). A3317). The details of the special figure 2 big hit end process will be described later in FIG. 54.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit medium processing, and the like. (A3318). The small hit fanfare process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small amount of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3319). It should be noted that the small hit middle process is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game process, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and a special figure 2 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for the operation is executed (A3320). The small hit remaining ball processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 59.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (A3202, A3302) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (A3401), and if the upper prize opening is not open (the result of A3401 is). "N"), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (A3402). When the remaining ball of the upper prize opening is not being processed (the result of A3402 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the lower prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (A3403). In the case of a big hit state or a small hit state, the upper big prize opening and / or the lower big winning opening may be open.

When the lower-ranking prize opening is open (the result of A3403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the lower-ranking winning opening switch (A3404), and the lower-ranking winning opening switch is used. When there is an input (the result of A3404 is "Y"), the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process is set to 1 (A3405). If the lower prize opening is not open (the result of A3403 is "N"), or if there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (the result of A3404 is "N"), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed. do.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is opening the upper prize opening (the result of A3401 is "Y") or is processing the remaining balls of the upper prize opening (the result of A3402 is "Y"). ), Set the winning counter to 0 (A3406). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 1 of the upper prize opening switch 39a (A3407), and when there is no input to the upper prize winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "N"). ), The process proceeds to step A3411.

When the game control device 100 receives an input to the upper prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the grand prize opening count command as an effect command (A3408) in order to perform the effect by winning. The effect command setting process is executed (A3409), and the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3410).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (A3411). If there is no input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3415. When there is an input to the upper prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3411 is "Y"), the grand prize opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3412) in order to perform the effect by winning, and the effect command setting process is executed. Then (A3413), the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3414).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning counter is 0 (A3415), and if the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3415 is "N"), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress. Whether or not it is determined (A3416). When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3416 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3417). When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3417 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (here, 1 or 2) is added to the number of large winning openings (A3418).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3415 is "Y"), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3416 is "Y"), or the small hit remains. If the ball processing is in progress (the result of A3417 is "Y"), the large winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (for example, 9 in the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (A3419), and the number of large winning opening counts. If is less than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "N"), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of big winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3419 is "Y"), the number of winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3420), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3421). ).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot is open (A3422), and if the jackpot is not open (the result of A3422 is "N"), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the jackpot is being opened (the result of A3422 is "Y"), the value of the jackpot opening operation end is saved in the jackpot opening control pointer area (A3423), and then the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3208) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM. Save (A3502). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during processing during display of special figure 2) to the end of the jackpot operation (processing of ending the jackpot of special figure 2), and the small of the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (process of ending the small hit of the special figure 2), it is considered that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the variation.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3503 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3507.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (the result of A3503 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes the effect command setting process (A3505), and displays it. A left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 0 (A3507). When the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3507 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3502). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of reserved special figures 1 becomes 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is "N"), the game control device 100 uses a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as an effect command. Prepare (A3508) and execute the effect command setting process (A3509). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (the result of A3514 is "N"), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress. It is determined whether or not it is (A3515). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final change (the result of A3515 is "N"), the special figure 1 change check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 change process transition setting process is executed (A3517). ). The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 11).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3514 is "Y") or is in the midst of high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag Is not set, and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517).

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3311) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3601). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is not variable startable (when variable start is not possible) (the result of A3601 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM. Save (A3602). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during processing during display of special figure 1) to the end of the jackpot operation (processing of ending the jackpot of special figure 1), and the small of the special figure 1 variation display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the small hit operation (process of ending the small hit of the special figure 1), it is considered that the special figure 2 variation display game cannot start the variation.

When the special figure 2 variation display game can start variable (the result of A3601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3602). Special figure 2 When the number of pending numbers is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603). The effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3606). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3607), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (the result of A3607 is "N"), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress. It is determined whether or not it is (A3608). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final change (the result of A3608 is "N"), the special figure 2 change check flag is set (A3609), and the special figure 2 change process transition setting process is executed (A3610). ). The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process (FIG. 11).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A3614 is "Y") or is in the midst of high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3615 is "Y"), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag Is not set, and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3617).

When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3602 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a special figure 2.
It is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (A3611). When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3611 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3612). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A3612 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3613). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3613 is "N"), the customer waiting demo in progress flag is set (A3614).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3615), and executes the effect command setting process (A3616). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (the result of A3611 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 Normally, the processing number “0” is saved in the game processing number area (A3617). In addition, even when the special figure 1 is changing (the result of A3612 is "Y") or the customer waiting demo has been started (the result of A3613 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, save the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3617).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3510) in the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, and the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information). ), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703), and the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are executed. do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3705). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3706). A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (that is, a probabilistic state) (A3708). When it is not a high-probability state (the result of A3708 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). When the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3709 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is "Y"), that is, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is within the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If is, the process proceeds to step A3714.

In the game control device 100, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3711 is "N"), whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number of times. Is determined (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number of times (here, 4) (the result of A3712 is “N”), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated by the value of (special figure 2 game processing timer area value + number of repetitions × 60,000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3714). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started is longer than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is "N"), the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is more special. FIG. 2 A command for notifying that the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3716). If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is equal to or longer than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, etc., the display device 41 decorates the special figure 1 variable display. Game-related productions may end abruptly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, a non-flashy one so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a high-probability variation number update process (A3717) that updates and manages the variation number (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game that starts in the high-probability state, and the special figure 1 variation start process. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "Y"), when it is in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "Y"), and when the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A3710 is "Y"). In "N"), the processing of steps A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A3717.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is a predetermined number of times (here, 4) or more (the result of A3712 is “Y”), the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game. (Here, 240 (= 4 × 60) seconds or more) is longer than the maximum variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, so a command for notifying that the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer. The process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing.

Further, even when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 also has the special figure 1 variable display game. The process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of is longer.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803), and the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed. do.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3805). ). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3806). A3807), the high-probability fluctuation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game starting in the high-probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3901a), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3902a). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the RWM (A3903a). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3905a). When the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A3905a is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3906a). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907a). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved is overwritten and saved (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

The game control device 100 acquires when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3905a is "Y") or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907a is "N"). Based on the big hit random value, the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A3909a). A3910a). In this embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is "Y"), the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3901a is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (A3911a). The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 25A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2" is used. Is replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The steps A3901b-A3911b in the jackpot flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a-A3911a in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3906a, A3906b) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A4003). .. Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, the big hit flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit, but it is also possible to provide the original small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4106), and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game. (A4102). Then, when the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is “Y”), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

When the small hit upper limit determination value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 28 shows a jackpot probability (probability that the determination result becomes a jackpot), a small hit probability (probability that the determination result becomes a small hit), and a missed probability (determination result is missed) by the above-mentioned big hit determination process and the small hit determination process. (Probability) is shown for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 28 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 28 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability (the probability of occurrence of a jackpot) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. The small hit probability (probability of small hit occurrence) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The probability of loss (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the loss probability is lower than that in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Therefore, since the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 is more advantageous to the player than the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (particularly regarding the small hit probability), the above-mentioned special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process Is executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only the probability variation symbol, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, the probability variation state (probability variation state) is reached without exception, and the probability variation inrush rate is 100%. Further, the high probability state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of the variable display game starts after the end of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4301a). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4301a is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302a). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4303a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304a). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305a), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306a). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4307a), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4308a). After that, the process proceeds to step A4316a. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4301a is "N"), whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 1 area. It is determined whether or not the game has been saved (A4309a). When the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (the result of A4309a is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) (A4310a). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4311a), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4312a). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4313a). After that, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

When the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (the result of A4309a is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4314a), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4315a). After that, the process proceeds to step A4316a.

After steps A4308a, A4313a, and A4315a, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4316a). The stop symbol pattern can be any of an out-of-order symbol, a plurality of jackpot symbols (4R probability variation A2, 8R probability variation A3, 16R probability variation A1, 16R probability variation B1-B3), and a small hit symbol (special figure 1 small hit). Corresponding. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the decorative special figure 1 command as the effect command in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A4317a), and executes the effect command setting process (A4318a). The decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319a), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4320a). ), Clear the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4321a). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (FIG. 29A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2" is set. Since "Special Figure 1" is replaced with "Special Figure 2" and the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A4301b-A4321b in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process correspond to steps A4301a-A4321a in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, respectively.

The stop symbol pattern set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process includes a missed symbol, a plurality of jackpot symbols (2R probability variation D1, 4R probability variation D3, 8R probability variation E2, 16R probability variation E1, F2, F3), and a plurality of stop symbols. It corresponds to any of the small hit symbols (Special Figure 2 small hit 1-3). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and the game ball at the second starting winning opening 37. As a variable display game based on the detection, the variable display game execution means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). When it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. The first half variation is a variation mode before the start of reach, and the second half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4404), and when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the game control device 100 specially maps to the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half variation according to the number of reserved special figures 1. The value is updated by adding 1 hold number (A4406), and the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4407). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (in the case of a miss) (the result of A4405 is "N"), the processing of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 hold number is added only to the first half offset data. Convert the value (A4407).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A4405-A4407, and the first half offset data and the second half offset acquired in step A4403. The process proceeds to step A4412 without updating or converting the data.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4408). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is "N"), the first half offset data for the miss / small hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4409), and the process of step A4411 is performed. Move to. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes variable for a long time. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has long-term fluctuations (long fluctuations), unlike the long fluctuations of the special figure 2 variable display game, 9 is not saved in the repetition count area. The long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the variable display game is shorter than the long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4412), and saves the latter half offset data (variable distribution). Information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state (in the low probability state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A4504). .. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the missed / small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability (A4505), and process in step A4507. Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes long-term fluctuation (long fluctuation).

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and stores the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). It is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4602), and prepares the variable pattern random number in FIG. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (the result of A4604 is "Y"), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random number for distribution is 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for hit. The hit size is set to 1 byte size to save data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610). By the above processing, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variable selection address table (A4701), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable selection table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4702). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4703), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4705). By the above processing, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variable selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4709), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4605) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the data at the head of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4801). It is determined whether or not the code is not distributed (A4802).

Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the data at the head of the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4807). ), Ends the 2-byte distribution process.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the data at the head of the second half variation group table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4802 is "N"), the first distribution value specified in the second half variation group table is one. (A4803).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in the process of step A4803 from the random number value (value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in the process of step A4603 of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. To calculate a new random number value (A4804). Further, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4805).

When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the next distribution value (A4806), and then processes after step A4803. To execute. That is, the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table is acquired (A4803), the distribution value determined in the process of step A4805 is used as a new random value, and the distribution value is subtracted, and then a new random value. Is calculated (A4804). Then, with respect to the calculated new random number value, each process is executed until it is determined in the process of step A4805 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the latter half variable group table.

Then, when the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4805 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4807), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4606, A4609, A4615, A4704, A4710) in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. Is.

In the game control device 100, first, the first data of the prepared second half variation group table (selection table), second half variation selection table (selection table), and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, ". 0 ”) is checked (A4901), and it is determined whether or not the code is unsorted (A4902).

Here, the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the second half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, a distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines the distribution result. Update to the address of the corresponding data (A4907), and end the distribution process.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (the result of A4902 is "N"), the second half fluctuation group table or The first distribution value specified in the latter half variable selection table and the first half variable selection table is acquired (A4903).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4903 from the loaded random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) to calculate a new random number value (A4904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4905).

When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the next distribution value (A4906), and performs the processing after step A4903. Run. That is, the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table is acquired (A4903), and the random value determined in step A4905 is used as a new random value to obtain the distribution value. Subtract and calculate a new random value (A4904). Then, it is executed until it is determined that the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table.

Then, when the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4905 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (A4907), and distributes the data. To finish.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5001). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used is cleared (A5002). ). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5001 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the random numbers of the variable pattern random numbers 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used are being set. Clear the storage area (A5003).

After steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5004) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5005). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5008), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5011 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), and the special figure 2 2 When the length variation of the variable display game is started (the result of A5011 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013). Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display In the long fluctuation of the game, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough for the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when the timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of 9 times is saved, the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2). The timer is subtracted in the game processing (FIG. 19) (A3303), and when the time is up (the result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3306), and the timer for length variation is added to the game processing timer. The value of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) is set. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can have a long variation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (A5017). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by -1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game. (A5019) and clear the free space after the shift (A5020). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the contents of the random number storage area are not shifted (special figure 1). Since the number of holdings is 1), the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process. In the high-probability fluctuation count update process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure fluctuation display game starting in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability fluctuation count as the remaining number of fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). If it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A5101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the low probability state is set (the low probability state can be set by the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variable display game but also the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a low probability state, and when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is special. FIG. 2 Not only the variable display game but also the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. It may be executed.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the high probability fluctuation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by -1 (1). (A5102). The initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later). ). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A5103). When the high probability fluctuation count is not 0 (the result of A5103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability fluctuation count update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5103 is "Y"), the signal relating to the high-probability end (off-data of two jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5105). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation. This is the off-data of the time reduction status signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5106). A5107), the high-probability final change flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start the change is set (A5108), and the high-probability change number update process is terminated.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation is started during the high probability even if the probability is low. In the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the fluctuation is not reduced to a low probability immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the winning judgment by the starting opening winning during this final fluctuation will be performed with a high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag at the start of the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation. Therefore, a high-probability final fluctuation flag is set and used to determine whether or not it is a high-probability final fluctuation (for example, in steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). Further, the high-probability final fluctuation flag also includes information that can determine which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the high-probability final fluctuation.

As described above, after the jackpot ends, the high-probability state is maintained until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games (initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number, for example, 50 times) is started, and the high-probability fluctuation count = 0, which is the predetermined number of times. When the eye fluctuation display game (high probability final fluctuation) is started, the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set, the time reduction state ends with the low probability state, and the high probability final fluctuation flag is further set. Is set.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (A3517) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the change in the special figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the processing number (A5201a) in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing process, and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5202a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A5203a), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5204a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A5205a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 1 of the special figure 1) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A5206a), and the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 is saved. The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved (A5207a), and the special figure 1 changing processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Transition processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3610) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the change in the special figure 2.

In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (FIG. 38A) is replaced with "special figure 2" (special symbol 2). Since the same processing as that of the transition setting processing during the change in Special Figure 1 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A5201b-A5207b in the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process correspond to steps A5201a-A5207a in the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, respectively.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in Special Figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5301). The number of times the symbol is fixed is output, and the number of times the symbol is fixed is used in the symbol editing process described later. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started has a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final change flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability change number update process, it can be determined that the high-probability final change is made. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started has a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5306 is "Y"), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of special figure 1. Set the corresponding display time (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 1, 2000 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 1, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 1. be.

The game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final change as the display time of the special figure 1 when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is not the high probability final change (the result of A5306 is "N"). (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also). It is determined whether or not it is being executed (A5310). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5310 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5320. When the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the process during display of the special figure 2 described later is being executed (A5311).

When the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5311 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5311 is “N”), the number of symbol confirmation outputs is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5313) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3303), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the off-design command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes the effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variable display game Will be forcibly terminated (forced termination) as a result of the loss.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) is timed up (A3204). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops variable, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is specified in special figure 1. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5323). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5325) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5325), and the special figure 1 changing process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the change of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in the special figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5401). The number of times the symbol is fixed is output, and the number of times the symbol is fixed is used in the symbol editing process described later. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started has a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final change flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability change number update process, it can be determined that the high-probability final change is made. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is not a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is "N"), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 corresponds to the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of special figure 2. Set the display time to be displayed (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 600 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 2. be. In addition, the display time of the out-of-order symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high-probability final fluctuation as the display time of the special figure 2. (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

In the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of order (the result of A5410 is “N”), whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is also running). (A5410). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5410 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5420. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of the special figure 1 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the process during display of the special figure 1 described later is being executed (A5411).

When the process being displayed in the special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5411 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5413. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5411 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5413) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3203), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the off-design command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5415), and executes the effect command setting process (A5416). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game Will be forced to end the fluctuation (end of execution) as a result of the loss.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result of A5421 is "N"), the game control device 100 has an upper limit of the number of rounds from the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5425) for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5425), and the special figure 2 changing process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5325) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5501a) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 1, saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5502a), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (off-data of the signal during fluctuation of special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag. Save to the area (A5504a), and end the process transition setting process 1 during display of special figure 1.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5425) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5501b) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 2, saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5502b), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 (off data of the signal during fluctuation of special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5503b).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 as the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. Save to the area (A5504b), and end the process transition setting process 1 during display of special figure 2.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5601a) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 1, saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5602a), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (A5606a), and special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. Is cleared (A5607a). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610a), and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5611a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the out-of-order stop symbol.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5601b) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 2, saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5602b), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (A5606b), and special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area. (A5607b). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (A5610b), and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5611b). By the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the out-of-order stop symbol.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. 43A and 43B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 1. FIG. 43A shows the first half portion of the special drawing 1 display processing, and FIG. 43B shows the second half portion of the special drawing 1 display processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 1 (indicating small hit information or missed information) from the small hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the small hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 1 area (A5703), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5704). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5705).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5706). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the on-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, the on-data of the signal during operation of the continuous accessory actuating device, and the on-data of the signal per special symbol 1. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit value table (A5709), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5710). The upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5712), and executes the effect command setting process (A5713). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5714), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5715).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5716). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on the conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on by a jackpot other than 2R, turned on by a 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off by a 2R jackpot in low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned on by a jackpot other than 2R, and has a high probability. It turns off with a medium 2R jackpot and turns on with a low probability of a 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5717), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5718). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening based on the information of opening the upper prize opening (A5719).

When the game control device 100 is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (the result of A5719 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the upper prize entrance fraudulent winning number area (A5720), and the RWM upper prize opening fraud monitoring period. The fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the flag area (A5721), and "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5724). If it is not a big hit to open the upper prize opening (A5719 result is "N"), clear the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area (A5722), and the RWM lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is out of the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5723), and "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5724).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5725), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5726), and ends the special drawing 1 display processing. ..

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5705 is "N"), the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 1. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 1 is a small hit) is determined (A5727). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5727 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5728). When the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5728 is "Y"), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5729), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A5730).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5731), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5732). The power failure recovery transmission command area saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery. After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area, prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is not a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5728 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5729 to A5732, and the hit symbol from the hit symbol command area. The command is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5733), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5734).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5735), and executes an effect command setting process (A5736). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A5737). When it is not in a high probability state (the result of A5737 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5738), and it is right-handed. In order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area of the RWM (A5739). When it is in a high probability state (the result of A5737 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5740), and it is right-handed. In order to light the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying the above, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5741).

After steps A5739 and A5741, the game control device 100 clears the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area (A5742), saves the fraud monitoring period out-of-fair monitoring period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5743), and saves the fraudulent monitoring period flag area. Special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is executed (A5744), and special figure 1 display process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit) (the result of A5727 is "N"), that is, the special figure 1 variation display game. If the result of the above is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5745). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5745 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When the game control device 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5745 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5746), and executes an effect command setting process (A5747). .. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5748), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5749). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5750). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5750 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5753.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5750 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5751). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is a right-handed hit, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5752). , Clear the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5753). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5754), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. In the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 2. FIG. 44A shows the first half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing, and FIG. 44B shows the second half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or missed information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 2 area (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal, the on-data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, and the on-data of the special symbol 2 hit signal. Subsequently, the special figure 2 abnormality change release command is prepared as an effect command (A5807), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5808).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the round number upper limit value table (A5809), and sets the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table. It is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (A5810). The upper limit of the number of rounds is, for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R. Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5811).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5812), and executes the effect command setting process (A5813). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5814), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5815).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5816). The signals here are, for example, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals that are turned on or off depending on the conditions. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on by a jackpot other than 2R, turned on by a 2R jackpot in high probability, turned off by a 2R jackpot in low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned on by a jackpot other than 2R, and has a high probability. It turns off with a medium 2R jackpot and turns on with a low probability of a 2R jackpot.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5817), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5818). Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening based on the information of opening the upper prize opening (A5819).

When the game control device 100 is a big hit of opening the upper prize opening (the result of A5819 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the upper prize entrance fraudulent winning number area (A5820), and the RWM upper prize opening fraud monitoring period. The fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the flag area (A5821), and "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5824). If it is not a big hit to open the upper prize opening (A5819 result is "N"), clear the lower prize opening fraudulent winning number area (A5822), and the RWM lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area is out of the fraud monitoring period. The flag is saved (A5823), and "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5824).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5825), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5826), and ends the special drawing 2 display processing. ..

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. Whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) is determined (A5827). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5827 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5828). When the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5828 is "Y"), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5829), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A5830).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5831), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5832). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area, prepared as an effect command (A5833), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5834). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time is not a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5828 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not process steps A5829 to A5832 and issues a command from the hit symbol command area. The winning symbol is loaded and prepared as an effect command (A5833), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5834).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5835), and executes an effect command setting process (A5836). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A5837). When it is not in a high probability state (the result of A5837 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838), and it is right-handed. In order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) to be notified, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5839). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A5837 is "Y"), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5840), and it is right-handed. In order to light the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) that notifies the game status display number 2, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5841).

After steps A5839 and A5841, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (A5842). If it is a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (A5842 result is "Y"), clear the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area (A5843), and the fraud monitoring period in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The outside flag is saved (A5844), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is executed (A5847), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. If it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (the result of A5842 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower prize opening, the lower prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (A5845). , Saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5846), executes the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5847), and ends the special figure 2 display process. ..

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5827 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variation display game. If the result of the above is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5848). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5848 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5856.

When the game control device 100 has a high probability final variation (the result of A5848 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) as an effect command (A5849), and executes an effect command setting process (A5850). .. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5851), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5852). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5853). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5853 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5856.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5853 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5854). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5855). , Clear the special figure 2 changing in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5856). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order, the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is executed (A5857), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. In the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1, "0" is set as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display processing and the special figure 2 display processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of a big hit (on-data of one big hit signal) in the external information output data area (A5901), and saves a signal related to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area. (A5902), and clear the round number area for managing the number of rounds in the RWM (A5903).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5904), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5905). By setting the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag, the hit probability becomes low probability and it becomes the state without time reduction (it is no longer in the time reduction state). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5906), and the high probability fluctuation frequency is maintained in the RWM. Clear the probability fluctuation frequency region (A5907).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the jackpot information in the special figure status area (A5908), and clears the high-probability final change flag area holding the high-probability final change flag in the RWM (A5909). Subsequently, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5910), and the second game state display unit 56 (ramp D8) for notifying that the right-handed time is being hit. In order to turn on −D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5911).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (A5912), and holds the special figure 2 abnormal number area in the RWM. 0 clear (A5913), special figure 1 holding the number of fluctuations in the RWM special figure 1 clearing the number of fluctuations area to 0 (A5914), special figure 2 holding the value of the abnormal change notification timer in the RWM special figure 2 abnormality The fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (A5915), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare medium processing Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5744) in the special figure 1 display process will be described. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 sets “7” as the processing number (A6001a) in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6002a). Subsequently, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6003a), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. (A6004a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special figure 1 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6005a), and is in the small hit in the special figure status area. Save the information (A6006a). Further, the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (A6007a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (A5847) in the special figure 2 display process will be described. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, "special figure 1" (special symbol 1) in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process (FIG. 46A) is changed to "special figure 2" (special symbol 2). Since the same processing as that of the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process correspond to the steps A6001b-A6007b in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, respectively.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3211, A3314) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number area by +1 (A6101). Since the number of rounds is set to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process (A5903), it is set to 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time. After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6102), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6104), and saves it in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6105). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value does not have to be 0, but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value may be used (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Further, a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated for one of the upper and lower prize openings and a pattern in which the other is opened only once may be used, and both the upper and lower prize openings are opened and closed. It may be a pattern that repeats or a pattern that opens only once.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds (A6106). Subsequently, "4" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (A6107), and it is determined whether or not the game is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6108). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6108 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6109), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6110). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6108 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6111), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6112).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit that opens the upper prize opening based on the information of opening the big prize opening (A6113). If it is a big hit to open the upper prize opening (the result of A6113 is "Y"), the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the big prize opening is executed (A6114), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. If it is not a big hit that opens the upper big prize opening (the result of A6113 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit that opens the lower big winning opening, the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the big winning opening is executed (A6115). , Fanfare / End processing during interval. In this embodiment, there are two types, a big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening and a big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening, but a big hit that opens both the upper big winning opening and the lower big winning opening is provided. It can also be configured.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (A6114) during the process during opening of the large winning opening in the fanfare / interval process will be described. FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of opening of the upper prize opening (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A6201a), and saves the signal (A6201a) in the large winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. , Turns on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b. Saves the upper prize opening on-data (A6202a), clears the number of large winning openings (A6203a), and ends the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the upper prize opening.

[Processing during opening of large winning opening Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the processing transition setting processing 2 (A6115) during the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the fanfare / interval processing will be described. FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening.

The game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) regarding the start of opening the lower prize opening in the test signal output data area (A6201b), and saves the signal (A6201b) in the large winning opening solenoid output data area of the RWM. , Turns on the lower prize opening solenoid 38b. Saves the lower prize opening on-data (A6202b), clears the large winning opening count (A6203b), and ends the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening opening processing (A3212, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the jackpot processing control pointer (A6301), and determines whether or not the value of the loaded jackpot processing control pointer is equal to or higher than the jackpot operation end value (for example, 21). (A6302). When the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is less than the jackpot operation end value (the result of A6302 is "N"), the jackpot processing control pointer is updated by +1 (A6303), and the processing according to the jackpot processing control pointer is performed. The operation transition setting process is executed (A6304), and the process of opening the large winning opening is terminated.

When the value of the jackpot operation control pointer is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (the result of A6302 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6305). If the number of rounds (A6101) updated by +1 in the fanfare / interval processing is the final number of rounds (for example, 16R, 8R, 4R, or 2R), it can be determined that the round is the final round.

If the game control device 100 is not the final round (the result of A6305 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an interval command as an effect command (A6306), and executes the effect command setting process (A6308). When it is the final round (the result of A6305 is "Y"), the ending command is prepared as an effect command (A6307), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6308).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (A6309), and sets "5" as the processing number in order to shift to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (A6310). ). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A6311). When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6311 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6312), and the remaining ball processing time is set to the special figure 1 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6313). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6311 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6314), and the remaining ball processing time is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save to (A6315).

After steps A6313 and A6315, the game control device 100 turns off both the lower prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper prize opening solenoid 39b, so that off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6316). The processing is finished while the large winning opening is open.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot operation transition setting process (A6304) in the process during the opening of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot operation transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first branches by the jackpot processing control pointer (A6401). For the jackpot processing control pointer, it is also possible to use the value before updating by +1 in step A6303 instead of the current value. When the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is an even number, a wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the jackpot processing control pointer is set (A6402), and off-data is saved in the jackpot solenoid output data area (A6403).

When the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is odd, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot opening time corresponding to the jackpot processing control pointer (A6404). For example, the big hit opening opening time is 200 msec when the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 1 to 19), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is 21 (big hit middle processing control pointer = 21). In the case of, it is 25,000 msec. The 200 msec large winning opening opening time is used in the case of a pattern in which the large winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed for a short time during one round. Subsequently, the upper prize opening solenoid 39b is turned on in the large winning opening solenoid output data area, and the upper winning opening on data is saved (A6405). As a result, the upper prize opening can be repeatedly opened and closed for a short time. Here, if the lower prize opening repeatedly opens and closes for a short time, the lower prize opening on-data can be saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area, or the lower major winning opening on data and the upper winning opening on can be turned on. It is also possible to save both data.

After steps A6403 and A6405, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6406). When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6406 is "Y"), the set time (wait time or big winning opening opening time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6407). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6406 is "N"), that is, if it is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6408). ).

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening residual ball processing (A3213, A3316) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the current round is the final round (A6501). If it is not the final round (the result of A6501 is "N"), the signal related to the end of opening the large winning opening (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) is output as a test signal. Save in the data area (A6502), set the interval time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6503), and set "3" as the processing number to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A6504). ). As a result, the fanfare / interval processing, the large winning opening opening processing, and the large winning opening remaining ball processing are repeated until the final round. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the interval time of the big winning opening.

When the game control device 100 is in the final round (the result of A6501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the jackpot end processing transition setting process for transitioning to the jackpot end process (A6505), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Is set (A6506), and "6" is set as the processing number (A6507). As a result, it is possible to shift to the jackpot end process. The length of the ending period is the total of the ending time and the processing time of the remaining balls of the large winning opening, and in this ending period, the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

After steps A6504 and A6507, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A6508). If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A6508 is "Y"), the set processing number ("3" or "6") is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6509) and set. The time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6510), and the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

When the game control device 100 is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6508 is "N"), that is, when it is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processing number ("3" or "6"). ) Is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6511), the set time (interval time or ending time) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6512), and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is completed. ..

[Big hit end processing Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (A6505) in the jackpot remaining ball processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) regarding the end of opening the large winning opening in the test signal output data area ( A6601), clear the large winning opening count area that holds the large winning opening count number in the RWM (A6602), and clear the round number area (A6603). Subsequently, the round number upper limit value area is cleared (A6604), the round number upper limit value information area is cleared (A6605), the big winning opening opening information area is cleared (A6606), and the jackpot processing control pointer area is cleared. (A6607).

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special drawing 1 normal processing (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A6702). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 big hit signal and the off data of 3 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit). (Continuous output of 2 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory, and off-data of the signal per special symbol. Subsequently, the signal relating to the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and a special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal. .. After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game state display number area with high probability (A6708), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and round LED pointer. The turn-off number is saved in the area (A6710). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A6711), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (A6712), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6714). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also a time saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit end processing. This special figure 2 game wait time value is for delaying the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6). It is set to. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 in FIG. 6) performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1310 in FIG. 6) in which the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed ( In A1311) of FIG. 6, since the determination of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts in the current timer interrupt process). ), The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. (Special figure 2 during game processing, special figure 2 normal processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a missed symbol (whether it is forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the big hit state, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing of the special figure 2 (A6801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6802). Then, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 big hit signal and the off data of 3 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit). (Continuous output of 2 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory, and off-data of the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Subsequently, the signal relating to the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and a special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal. .. After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game state display number area with high probability (A6808), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and round LED pointer. The turn-off number is saved in the area (A6810). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A6811), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (A6812), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6814). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probabilistic symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also a time saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

It is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. If the determination (inside the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3215, A3318) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare processing.

First, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A6901). The opening pattern of the large winning opening by a small hit corresponds to the stop symbol number (A4312a, A4312b) of the small hit and the small hit symbol (stop symbol pattern of A4313a, A4313b).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6902), and executes the effect command setting process (A6902). A6903). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6904), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6905), and the small hit opening time 1 (for example, 48 msec) is set as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special figure 1 Save in the game processing timer area (A6906). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6907), and the lower special winning opening on-data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6908).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6909), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6910). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6911), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6912), and the small hit opening time 2 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6913). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6914), and the lower special winning opening on-data is stored in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6915).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening command for opening the upper prize opening as an effect command (A6916), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6917). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6918), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6919), and the small hit opening time 3 (for example, 1200 msec) is set as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6920). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6921), and the upper prize-winning port on-data is stored in the large-winning port solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6922).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 3, the game control device 100 prepares the small hit opening command for opening the upper prize opening as an effect command (A6923), and executes the effect command setting process. (A6924). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6925), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6926), and the small hit opening time 4 (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the big winning opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6927). Subsequently, the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6928), and the upper prize-winning port on-data is stored in the large-winning port solenoid output data area. Is saved (A6929).

After steps A6908, A6915, A6922, and A6929, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening count area (A6930), and ends the processing during the small hit fanfare.

As described above, for each type of small hit opening pattern (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) corresponding to the small hit stop symbol number or small hit symbol, the large hit is opened by the small hit. The winning opening (either the upper winning opening or the lower major winning opening) and the opening time of the large winning opening (small hit opening time) are determined. In this embodiment, the control pointer is not set and only the small hit opening pattern in which the big winning opening opens only once. However, as in the case of the big hit, the control pointer is set to open and close the big winning opening. There may be a repeating small hit opening pattern. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (A3216, A3319) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit medium processing.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit end screen command as an effect command (A7001), and executes an effect command setting process (A7002). As a result, the effect control device 300 that has received the small hit end screen command can display the small hit end screen on the display device 41.

Next, the game control device 100 performs branching according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening by the small hit (special figure 1 small hit, special figure 2 small hit 1, 2, 3) (A7003).

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 1 small hit, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7004), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7005). , The small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7006). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper prize opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7007), and the small hit middle processing is completed.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 1, the game control device 100 sets "9" as the processing number (A7008), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7009). ), The small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7010). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper prize opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7011), and the small hit middle processing is completed.

When the opening pattern by the small hit is the special figure 2 small hit 2 or the special figure 2 small hit 3, the game control device 100 sets “9” as the processing number (A7012), and sets the special figure 2 game processing number area. The processing number is saved (A7013), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7014). Subsequently, in order to turn off both the lower prize opening solenoid 38b and the upper prize opening solenoid 39b, off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A7015), and the small hit middle processing is completed.

By setting "9" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit remaining ball processing after the small hit middle processing is completed.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A3217, A3320) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing the small hit residual sphere.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game (A7101). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "Y"), "10" is set as the processing number (A7102), and this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7102). A7103), the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A7104).

The game control device 100 sets "10" as the processing number when it is not a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A7101 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. (A7105), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7106), and the small hit ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7107).

After steps A7104 and A7107, the game control device 100 outputs a signal related to the end of the small hit operation (off data of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and off data of the special electric accessory 2 operating signal) as test signal output data. Save to the area (A7108), clear the large winning opening count area (A7109), and finish the small hit remaining ball processing. By setting "10" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit end processing after the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A7201), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A7202). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in the high probability state (A7207). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "Y"), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and the game state display number 2 area is saved. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as in step A6717 of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (FIG. 53), 8 msec (2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle, is set. It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area as a special figure 2 game wait time value. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start variable at the same time.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Then (A7304), the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize-winning opening (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in the high probability state (A7308). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "Y"), the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. When it is not in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and the game state display number 2 area is saved. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated.

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 54), it is not necessary to provide the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control processing (A3220, A3323) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol variation control process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 (special symbol 1) and the special figure 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

First, in the game control device 100, among the special figures 1 and 2, the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is a changing flag (flag indicating that the special figure is changing). Check whether or not (A7401). If it is fluctuating, the fluctuating flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area (A5205a, A5205b).

Then, as a result of the check, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402), and if the special figure fluctuation control flag is the changing flag (A7402). The result is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is acquired (A7403). The address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined in the variation control table (A3219, A3322). Further, among the special figures 1 and 2, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1) is updated by -1 (A7404), and the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up. Whether or not it is determined (A7405).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (the result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires display data corresponding to the value of the target changing symbol number area (A7408). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7405 is "Y"), the initial value of the blinking control timer (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (A7406). Further, among the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the changing symbol number related to the controlled target special figure (for example, special figure 1) is updated by +1 and saved in the target changing symbol number area (A7407), and the target. The display data corresponding to the value in the symbol number area during the change of is acquired (A7408). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

In this way, the variable display game that repeats the non-lighting symbol (changing symbol number = 0) and the lighting symbol (changing symbol number = 1) is controlled by the special symbol display (special symbol 1 display 51 or). It is executed by the special figure 2 display 52). The initial value of the changing symbol number is set to 0, which indicates a non-lighting symbol, for example (A5207a, A5207b).

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not the changing flag (the result of A7402 is "N"), the game control device 100 has a symbol display table (for example, special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, special figure 1). (For stop) is acquired (A7409). The address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined in the fluctuation control table (A3219, A3322). Then, the display data corresponding to the value (stop symbol number) of the target stop symbol area is acquired (A7410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

In this way, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52) to be controlled is assigned a stop symbol number. The stop symbol of the corresponding special figure will be displayed. In the stop symbol area, stop symbol numbers are saved corresponding to big hits, small hits, or misses (A5324, A5424).

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1305), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1313), and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1314). Performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A7801). When the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A7801 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A7802). When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (A7802 result is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7803), and the off data of the security signal is the external information output data. Save to the area (A7804).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A7801 is "Y") or the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a door. The on-data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7805), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7806).

After steps A7804 and A7806, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A7807), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A7808). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1026 in the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is timed from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A7808 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A7809). When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A7808 is "N"), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and the process proceeds to step A7811. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

When the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7809 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A7811). When the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A7809 is "Y"), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A7810), and then the process proceeds to step A7811. When a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A7811 is "Y"), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7812), and the process proceeds to step A7813.

When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (the result of A7811 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the magnet fraud is occurring (A7813). When the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A7813 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A7814). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A7814 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the large winning opening fraud is occurring (A7815). If the fraudulent winning occurrence flag for the large winning opening (upper major winning opening or lower major winning opening) is saved in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the fraudulent winning slot is occurring. When the big winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A7815 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the special figure 2 abnormal change (the abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 change display game) is occurring (the abnormal execution state of the special figure 2 variation display game). A7816). When the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area, it can be determined that the special figure 2 abnormal change is occurring. Special Figure 2 When no abnormal fluctuation is occurring (the result of A7816 is “N”), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A7817).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A7813 is "Y") and the board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A7814 is "Y"), the big prize opening fraud is When it is occurring (the result of A7815 is "Y"), or when the special figure 2 anomalous fluctuation is occurring (the result of A7816 is "Y"), the on-data of the security signal is sent to the external information output data area. Save (A7818) and save the on-data of the game machine error status signal to the test signal output data area (A7819). Depending on the on-data setting of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

After steps A7817 and A7819, the game control device 100 has a start port 1 signal editing process (A7820), a start port 2 signal editing process (A7821), a main prize ball signal editing process (A7822), and a symbol fixed number signal editing process (A7822). A7823) is executed, and the external information editing process is terminated. The start port 1 signal editing process is a process when the start port 1 switch 36a is input, and the start port 2 signal edit process is a process when the start port 2 switch 37a is input.

[Symbol confirmation count signal editing process]
Next, the details of the symbol fixed number signal editing process (A7023) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol determination number signal editing process. The symbol confirmation count signal editing process is a process of outputting a symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is finalized to an external device.

First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is not 0 (A8101). The minimum value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is 0 (A8102).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A8102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the symbol confirmation count signal output count is 0. (A8103).

Then, when the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is not 0 (the result of A8103 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol confirmation number signal output by -1 (A8104), and outputs the symbol confirmation number signal. The initial value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is saved in the control timer (A8105). The initial value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is the time obtained by adding the time (for example, 256 msec) of the symbol confirmation count signal in the on state (for example, high level) and the time (for example, 300 msec) in the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 556 msec).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the on-data for turning on the symbol confirmation count signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A8107), and ends the symbol confirmation count signal editing process. When the number of symbol confirmation count signals is 0 (the result of A8103 is "Y"), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A8108), the symbol determination count signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A8102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section. (A8106). The fact that the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 msec) or more.

When the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section (the result of A8106 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs on-data for turning on the symbol confirmation count signal to the external information of the RWM. Save to the data area (A8107). If the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A8106 is "N"), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is the RWM external information output data. It is saved in the area (A8108), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is completed.

[Modification example of control of game control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the game control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-mentioned control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIGS. 39, 40, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game or special figure 2 fluctuation display game), the other special figure fluctuation display game When (special figure 2 variable display game or special figure 1 variable display game) becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), one of the special figure variable display games is forcibly terminated (forced termination) with a missed result. However, as in the following modification, in this case, for this one special figure fluctuation display game, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone the game and restart the interrupted special figure variation display game after the end of the hit operation related to the other special figure variation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

Even during the interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game, the change of the special symbol (identification information) itself apparently continues on the display device 41 and the special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). (It is also possible to temporarily stop the change of the special symbol during the suspension). If the fluctuation seems to continue, it can be said that, in another concept, the fluctuation time is extended by the amount of the hit operation time (the time of the big hit state or the small hit state) with respect to the other special figure. ..

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing (A1310) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing according to the modified example. FIG. 63 is obtained by adding the process of step S8200 to FIG. Since the processes from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 63 have the same contents as those in FIG. 18, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). Special Figure 1 When the game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is “N”), the processes from steps A3201 to A3220 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8200 is “Y”), the game control device 100 changes the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processes of steps A3201 to A3218. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for control (A3219), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and then the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol variation control process causes the special symbol variation itself to apparently continue on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing (A1311) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing according to the modified example. FIG. 64 shows that the process of step S8300 is added to FIG. Since the processes from steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 64 have the same contents as those in FIG. 19, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). Special Figure 2 When the game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is “N”), the processes from steps A3301 to A3323 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8300 is “Y”), the game control device 100 changes the special figure 2 display 52 without performing the processes of steps A3301 to A3321. After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for control (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process according to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A3323), and then the special figure 2 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variation time is stopped. It should be noted that the symbol variation control process causes the special symbol variation itself to apparently continue on the special figure 2 display 52.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 changing process (A3209) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing 1 changing process according to the modified example. In FIG. 65, the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG. 39 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8411 to S8416 are added. Since the processes of steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 of FIG. 65 have the same contents as those of FIG. 39, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and the special figure 2 is changing (in the case of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed) (A5309). The result is "N" and the result of A5310 is "Y"), and the process of steps S8411 to S8416 interrupts the special figure 2 variable display game. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not out of order and the special figure 2 is in fluctuation (S8411). .. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of S8411 is “Y”), whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 msec). Judgment (S8412). That is, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing as the special figure 1 variable display game (within the same interrupt processing). do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (this time timer interrupt). (Starting within the process), the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) and becomes 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with a missed result. Therefore, in this case, since it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of order (the result of S8411 is “N”), or when the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “N”). ”), A special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 interruption command for instructing the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and the effect command setting process is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 interruption command can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the game processing timer of FIG. 2 by -1 (decrease by 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease by 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the special figure 1 game processing this time. Here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the special figure 2 game processing timer is excessively increased by 4 msec when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (see FIG. 85).

After step S8416, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5320 to A5325 in the same manner as in FIG. 39. It should be noted that, unlike FIG. 39, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 changing process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in FIG. 2 according to the modified example. In FIG. 66, the processes of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 40 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8511 to S8513 are added. Since the processes of steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 of FIG. 66 have the same contents as those of FIG. 40, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and the special figure 1 is changing (in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed) (A5409). The result is "N" and the result of A5410 is "Y"), and the process of steps S8511 to S8513 interrupts the special figure 1 variable display game. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops fluctuating, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of alignment and the special figure 1 is changing. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8200 described above. Subsequently, the decorative special figure 1 interruption command for instructing the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and the effect command setting process is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 interruption command can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5420 to A5325 in the same manner as in FIG. 40. Note that, unlike FIG. 40, the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 is not executed in the process during the change of the special figure 2 according to the modified example.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 67 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8617 to S8621 to FIG. 53. Since the processes from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 67 have the same contents as those in FIG. 53, the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8617 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 The game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8617 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8618) and execute the effect command setting process (S8619). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). , Special figure 1 Ends the big hit end process.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the timekeeping (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is ". N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

The process of step S8621 is the same as that of step A6717 of FIG. 53, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state ends by the special figure 1 variable display game. (Resume) is set to be delayed at the time of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt cycle. As a result, the timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game can restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game will start (restart) within the timer interrupt process of this time before the special figure 1 variable display game. If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) before the special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the big hit state, the process of step A8621 is omitted. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

Further, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is made at the time of the next timer interrupt process based on the special figure 2 game wait time value, but the decorative special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, so that the time for one interrupt (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modification Example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 68 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. 54. Since the processes from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 68 have the same contents as those in FIG. 54, the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8717 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 1 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8717 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8718) and execute the effect command setting process (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is terminated.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the timekeeping (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is ". N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set. This is because the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can both be started (restarted) in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 69A is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. 58. Since the processes from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 58 have the same contents as those in FIG. 58, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted when it is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”) or after step A7209 (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8810 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8811) and execute the effect command setting process (S8812). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is completed. do. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. The process of step S8814 is the same as that of step A7210 of FIG. 58. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 69B is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8911 to S8814 to FIG. 59. Since the processes from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 59 have the same contents as those in FIG. 59, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted when it is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”) or after step A7310 (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the result of S8911 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-mentioned modification of the control of the game control device 100 (a configuration in which the interrupted special figure variation display game is restarted). In the case of the basic configuration (configuration that is not a modification) for forcibly terminating the special figure variation display game, the process related to the interruption and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B1001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B1002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is executed (B1011). Then, a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number is executed (B1011), a received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and a corresponding received command check process is executed (B1012). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect display editing process such as updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1013). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1014).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is "N"), the processing of B1015 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1015 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B1016). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1017).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B1018). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1019). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a bonus operation effect.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B1019 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. After that, the processes from B1008 to B1019 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the details of the received command check process (B1012) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 70) will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, in the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 71) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of the special decorative symbol, and includes variable commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 36). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-type command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a big hit or a small hit, and is, for example, a hit symbol command, a round command, a small hit opening command, or the like. .. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit-type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit-type command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command (A4316a in FIG. 29A) and a decorative special figure 2 command (A4316b in FIG. 29B) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 17). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N") (B1215). ). The look-ahead fluctuation command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 17). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command when the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N") (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and a single-shot command process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a command for recovering from a power failure when the MODE section does not represent a command for RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"). (B1305). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the command at the time of power failure recovery is a special figure. 1 A suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is included.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command when the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N") (the result of B1305 is "N"). B1307). Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command when the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"). (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, so that the processes of steps B1311 and B1312 may be omitted. However, in the case where the special figure 2 variation display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory is generated (for example, the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit). In the case), the special figure hold information determination process (pre-reading process, advance determination process) is also performed in the above-mentioned special figure start port 2 switch process (FIG. 16), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is performed from the game control device 100. May be sent.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command when the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N") (the result of B1313 is "N"). B1315). As error / illegal commands, for example, an illegal occurrence command (A2108), an illegal release command (A2116), a special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command (A2414), a special figure 2 abnormal change release command (A2418), and a state off. There is a command (A2504) and a status on command (A2507). Then, when the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), and then the MODE section represents a command for switching the effect mode. Judgment (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), and then the MODE unit represents a command for stopping the symbol. (B1319). The commands for stopping the symbol include the decorative special figure 1 stop command and the decorative special figure 2 stop command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If the command is not normal (the result of B1320 is "N"), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the command is normal (the result of B1320 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets a stop for stopping the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (B1321). Then, when all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate a state such as changing, big hit, small hit, and the like.

If the MODE unit does not represent a command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for suspending fluctuations. (B1323). The commands for suspending the fluctuation are the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 66) and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 65). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for suspending fluctuation (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the fluctuation suspension setting process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a command for resuming fluctuations when the MODE section does not represent a command for suspending fluctuations (the result of B1323 is “N”). (B1325). The commands for resuming the fluctuation are the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 68) and the decorative special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 67). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for suspending the fluctuation (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Even if the command for suspending the fluctuation is not received, if the hit command related to the production of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game of one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is received, On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

In the one-shot command processing, the effect control device 300 may receive a command other than the above-mentioned command and perform the corresponding processing.

[Variation interruption setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the details of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 73) will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for suspending fluctuation is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (the result of B1401 is "N"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is received when the power is turned on (B1402). When the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "Y"), the decoration special figure variation display game corresponds to the received command (decorative special figure 1 interruption command or decoration special figure 2 interruption command). The suspended flag of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that is being suspended is set (B1403).

When the effect control device 300 does not receive a command when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "N"), the design to be interrupted (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) is changing. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the variable display game of the symbol to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is "N"), the change interruption setting process is terminated. When the target symbol is changing (the result of B1404 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the received command for suspending the fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (B1405).

When the received command for suspending the fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special figure 1 for interruption (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variation display of the decorative special figure 1 is displayed large in the center, a variation display for interruption is set so that the variation display is moved to a corner and displayed in a small size. Alternatively, a variable display for interruption may be set to be displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual. Subsequently, the interrupting flag of the decorative special figure 1 indicating that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (B1408).

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), the display device 41 or the like indicates that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the interruption effect is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is "N"), that is, in the high probability state, the effect of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display setting of the effect for interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not performed, and the variation interruption setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the effect of the big hit of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, so that the decoration is displayed. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display The variable interruption setting process is terminated without setting the display of the game interruption effect.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the received command for suspending the fluctuation is not the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "N"), that is, when the decorative special figure 2 interruption command is used, the decorative special figure 2 The fluctuation display for interruption is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 is greatly enlarged (main display, normal display) in the center, it is moved to a corner and reduced to a small size. A variable display for interruption may be set, or a variable display for interruption that is displayed in a state with higher transparency than usual may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (B1413).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is "N"), that is, in the high probability state, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (B1414). ). If the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display device 41 or the like indicates that the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the interruption effect is executed (B1415), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, so that the decorative special figure 2 variation. Display Ends the variable interruption setting process without setting the display of the game interruption effect. Further, when the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the effect of the big hit of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, so that the decoration is displayed. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display The variable interruption setting process is terminated without setting the display of the game interruption effect.

[Variation restart setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 73) will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the fluctuation restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is "N"), the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. When it is a normal command (the result of B1501 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 resuming command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming the variation is the decorative special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 changes the decorative special figure 1 based on the suspended flag of the decorative special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is interrupted (B1503). Decoration Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is "N"), the variable restart setting process is terminated.

When the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is suspended (the result of B1503 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 clears the suspension flag of the decoration special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display indicating that the power failure has been restored or that processing is being performed after the power failure is restored. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the variation restart of the decoration special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability status (restart of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "N"), the decoration special figure 1 variation display according to the probability state is set to restart (not for recovery) (B1507).

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the received command for resuming the fluctuation is not the decorative special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "N"), that is, when the decorative special figure 2 restart command is used, the decorative special figure 2 Based on the suspended flag of, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (B1508). Decoration Special Figure 2 If the variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1508 is "N"), the variable restart setting process is terminated.

When the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is suspended (the result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the suspended flag of the decorative special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special figure 2 for recovery according to the probability status (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game for recovery) is set. (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is "N"), the decoration special figure 2 variation display according to the probability state is set to restart (not for recovery) (B1512).

Regarding the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed when the interruption of the decorative special figure variation display game is started and when it is resumed. Therefore, at the time of resumption, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not it is in the probability state of preferentially displaying the target symbol. For example, if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted during a low probability, the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 is interrupted in a state where the fluctuation continues in the corner of the display device 41, but if the probability is low even at the time of restart, the special figure 1 is interrupted. Is restarted with a large priority displayed in the center of the display device 41. If there is a high probability / time saving state at the time of restart, restart with the reduced symbol (reduced display).

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the details of the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is not transmitted from the game control device 100, the process of step B1603 is basically not executed. However, in the case where the special figure 2 variation display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory is generated (for example, the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit). In the case), the game control device 100 may send a decorative special figure 2 hold number command to execute the process of step B1603.

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1215) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation system command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and the look-ahead fluctuation system command is used. Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the converted MODE section and ACT section are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE unit changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, it will be a long first half change, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, it will be a short first half change. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead variation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-pre-reading change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are different types of normal reach, such as normal reach -1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold that has occurred most recently is out of order (B1711). .. When the latest hold is a hit (the result of B1711 is "N"), the effect control device 300 calculates the total time until the change of the special figure change display game of the latest hold ends (B1712). The total time includes the display time of the stopped symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decorative special figure change display game will be interrupted at the end of the change of the latest pending special figure change display game (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variable display game is the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, if the other decorative special figure variation display game is not executed after the calculated total time, or if the other decorative special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the other decorative special figure variation display game is used. Judge not to interrupt.

When the effect control device 300 interrupts the other decorative special figure variation display game (the result of B1713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a plan to execute the look-ahead effect for the interruption hold (B1714). In addition, the suspension hold is a hold corresponding to the decoration special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that there is an execution schedule includes the fact that the look-ahead effect is being executed. When there is an execution schedule of the look-ahead effect for the interruption hold (the result of B1714 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect of the break hold is a hold change notice (B1715).

When the pre-reading effect of suspension hold is not a hold change notice (the result of B1715 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect replacement for the pre-reading effect of suspension hold is in time (B1716). If the pre-reading effect has already progressed and it is impossible to forcibly end it, it is determined that the effect replacement is not in time (no replacement is performed). When the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is "Y"), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (B1717) so that the effect can be replaced.

The effect control device 300 suspends the suspension when the latest hold is out of order (the result of B1711 is "Y") and the other decorative special figure variation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1713 is "N"). If there is no plan to execute the look-ahead effect for (B1714 result is "N"), if the interrupt hold look-ahead effect is a hold change notice (B1715 result is "Y"), the effect replacement cannot be made in time (B1716). The result is "N"), and the process directly proceeds to the process of step B1718 without replacing the effect.

Next, the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area (B1718), and executes the look-ahead lottery process regarding the look-ahead effect of the latest hold (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold pre-reading notice effect occurs (B1720). When the latest pending look-ahead notice effect occurs (the result of B1720 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the generated look-ahead notice effect is an effect that starts immediately (B1721). For example, the look-ahead notice effect is a hold change notice, and the effect that starts immediately includes, for example, a hold change notice when a hold occurs. When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold pre-reading notice effect does not occur (the result of B1720 is "N"), or when the generated pre-reading notice effect is not immediately started (the result of B1721 is "N"). ), As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special figure hold information determination process (look-ahead processing, advance determination process) is not performed in the special figure start port 2 switch process, the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold). On the other hand, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) and the look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) are not transmitted from the game control device 100. Therefore, the processes of steps B1715 to B1717 are basically not executed. However, in the case where the special figure 2 variation display game does not start immediately even if the special figure 2 start memory is generated (for example, the winning to the second starting winning opening 37 is not invalidated during the small hit). In the case), the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) are transmitted from the game control device 100, and the processes of steps B1711 to B1717 are executed. good.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 72) described above will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, and 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 72) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, such as when a symbol-based command of a probabilistic symbol is received even though a variable-system command that is out of alignment is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and performs the effect during variation. The variable effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, the game state is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 79) described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and production mode (B2002), and the variation command (B2002). The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

The effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special symbol type, the effect mode, and the symbol type when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation pattern type is reach variation. The advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the variable pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for a notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (B2007), and the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section of the variable command is set. It is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). From the variable commands, you can see the variable time and the main reach contents.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the advance notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the staggered pattern in the case of an out-of-order symbol.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B2013 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is related to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). The fluctuation of this time is a decorative special figure fluctuation display game executed by the fluctuation system command of this time. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is greatly enlarged (normal display) in the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

When the effect control device 300 relates to a symbol whose main display is the current variation (the result of B2014 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variation effect (B2015) and sets the display of the advance notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is set (B2017), and the voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2018).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary in the display device 41. When there is (4th symbol), the display setting of the 4th symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED other than the display device 41.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is "Y") and the change this time is not related to the symbol whose main display is (the result of B2014 is "Y"). N "), that is, when the fluctuation this time is a fluctuation during the power failure recovery display and is related to a symbol displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display device 41, the fluctuation effect or the advance notice effect is performed so as not to perform a flashy effect. Etc. (processing from B2015 to B2018) is not performed, and the display setting of the decorative special map variation corresponding to the special map type is performed (B2019).

[Modification example of control of production control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the effect control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-mentioned control (processing) of the effect control device.

[Variation interruption setting process (modification example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process according to the modified example. In FIG. 81, the processes of steps B1402, B1403, B1410, and B1415 are deleted from FIG. 74, and the processes of steps T2115, T2116, T2117, and T2118 are added. In FIG. 81, the same processing as in FIG. 74 is assigned the same step number (reference numeral), and the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), and the result of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is). "N"), decoration special figure 1 Variable display Set the freeze display of the variable effect of the game (T2115). The variable effect includes the above-mentioned variable effect and advance notice effect. The freeze includes, for example, a freeze (stop) of a movie (movie). Here, you may also set the display of a series of movies until it freezes. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image (movie display of a character or the like) for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is set (T2116).

Further, the effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 interruption command is not in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is "N"), and the result of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (B1414). The result is "N"), and the freeze display setting of the variable display game is set (T2117). The variable effect includes the above-mentioned variable effect and advance notice effect. The freeze includes, for example, a freeze (stop) of a movie (movie). Here, you may also set the display of a series of movies until it freezes. Subsequently, the display setting of the superimposed image for freeze effect to be displayed on the display device 41 is set (T2118).

In the above, the freeze effect is performed after receiving the decoration special figure interruption command, but based on the look-ahead command, the effect is performed before the decoration special figure interruption command is received, and the decoration special figure interruption command is received. At the same time, you may create a freeze-like effect to enhance your interest.

[Variation restart setting process (modification example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation restart setting process according to the modified example. FIG. 82 includes the processes of steps T2210-T2215 and T2216-T2221 instead of the processes of steps B1505-B1507 and B1510-B1512 of FIG. In FIG. 82, the same processing as in FIG. 75 is assigned the same step number (reference numeral), and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step B1504, the effect control device 300 sets the resumption of the variation of the decorative special figure 1 (resumption of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game) according to the probability state (T2210). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2211). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2211 is "Y"), set the resumption of the change of the decorative special figure 1 (restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) in the reduced symbol (reduced display) (T2212). ).

If the effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command is not displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of T2211 is "N"), it determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (. T2213). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (the result of T2213 is "Y"), the display setting of the rewind effect and the reproduction speed are set (T2214), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. In the rewinding effect, the display device 41 once again performs the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2213 is "N"), the time for the rewinding effect is insufficient, so the restart effect is displayed using the electric accessory and the accessory drive is set (T2215). ), Ends the fluctuation restart setting process.

Further, after step B1509, the decorative special figure 2 restart command effect control device 300 sets the variable restart of the decorative special figure 2 (restart of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) according to the probability state (T2216). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (T2217). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of T2217 is "Y"), set the restart of the decoration special figure 2 (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game) in the reduced symbol (reduced display) (T2218). ).

When the effect control device 300 is not displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of T2217 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (T2219). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (the result of T2219 is "Y"), the display setting of the rewind effect and the reproduction speed are set (T2220), and the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. In the rewinding effect, the display device 41 once again performs the effect before the interruption of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game at a high reproduction speed. When the remaining fluctuation time is less than the predetermined time (the result of T2219 is "N"), the rewinding effect time is not enough, so the restart effect is displayed using the electric accessory and the accessory drive is set (T2221). ), Ends the fluctuation restart setting process.

[Action and effect of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, the effects of the present embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 83 to 90. Note that, in FIGS. 83 to 90, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are abbreviated as the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed on a display device based on the establishment of a start condition, and is a result aspect of the variable display game. Is a predetermined result mode (a hit result mode including a small hit result mode and a big hit result mode), a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) capable of imparting a game value to the player can be generated.

In the special figure 1 game processing as the first control means, the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening 36). Take control. In the special figure 2 game processing as the second control means, the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, winning the second start winning opening 37). Take control.

Both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the running state (execution state). Then, when one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result mode (predetermined result mode), the other variable display game is terminated and the other variable display game is terminated. The display game may be used as the result mode (FIGS. 39, 40, 42A, 42B). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game have a hit result mode. If both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stop in the hit result mode, the gaming machine 10 has a hit operation relating to one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Since it can only be executed, problems occur.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 83, a process (FIG. 39, FIG. 40, FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B) for stopping the variation display of one of the variation display games in the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 83) is executed. At that time, it is possible to execute a process of forcibly ending the variable display of the other variable display game in the result mode (FIGS. 39, 40, 42A, 42B). This allows the other variable display game to continue as long as possible. Further, the new variable display game of the other is not started until the predetermined gaming state (small hit state, large hit state) that occurs when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode is completed (Special Figure 1 of FIG. 21). Normal processing, special figure 2 normal processing in FIG. 22). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game have a hit result mode.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 84, when one variable display game has a hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 84), the execution time (variable time) of the other variable display game is measured (measured). ) The other variable display game may be interrupted by stopping the update of the special figure game processing timer (timekeeping means) (modifications of FIGS. 63, 64, 65, 66). When the predetermined game state generated when one of the variable display games becomes the hit result mode is completed, the other variable display game can be restarted by restarting the update of the special figure game processing timer (timekeeping means) (FIG. 63). 64, 67 to 69B, modified examples). As shown in the shaded area of FIG. 84, the other variable display game after restart can be executed by the amount of the remaining variable time after interruption (remaining time of the timer).

Further, since the other variable display game can be restarted even if it is interrupted, unlike the case where the game is forcibly stopped in the disengagement result mode, when the other variable display game is a hit result, the other variable display game is restarted and then the other variable display game is restarted. It is possible to generate a predetermined game state (small hit state, big hit state) by the display game, and it is possible to prevent a problem that the profit of the player is impaired. For example, if one variable display game derives a small hit result mode during execution of the other variable display game that becomes the big hit result mode, the other variable display game is interrupted, but the small hit game by one variable display game is interrupted. When the state ends, the other variable display game can be restarted to derive the jackpot result mode.

Further, in order to execute the process of interrupting the variable display of the other variable display game when executing the process of stopping the variable display of one variable display game in the hit result mode, the other variable display game is executed as much as possible. Can be continued. During the interruption of the other variable display game, if the identification information of the other variable display game is displayed in a variable manner, the apparent fluctuation can be continued, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, the game control program (game control program) stored in the storage means (ROM111b) of the game control means (game control device 100) includes a main process and a timer interrupt process for the main process. It should be noted that the present embodiment can be applied to other interrupt processing instead of the timer interrupt processing. In the same timer interrupt process, the special figure 1 game process (first control means, first control process) has priority over the special figure 2 game process (second control means, second control process), and the special figure 1 game After the processing, the special figure 2 game processing is executed.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85 (a), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 64) Since the game processing timer cannot be updated, the special figure 2 game processing timer (counting means) for timing the execution time of the variable display game is updated for the time (4 msec) for one interrupt cycle (step A8416 in FIG. 65). ). As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the fluctuation is restarted is executed for an extra time for one interrupt cycle. As shown in the time chart of FIG. 85 (b), when this timer is not updated, the interrupt cycle is 1 with respect to the entire fluctuation time (t1 before interruption + t2 after interruption) when updating. The total fluctuation time increases by the time of the batch (4 msec). On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result mode and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, it is not necessary to update the timer for measuring the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 86 (a), the predetermined gaming state (small hit gaming state in FIG. 86) that occurs when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the hit result mode (small hit result mode in FIG. 86) is At the end, the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game is not delayed by a predetermined time (wait time) by the delay timer (delay means) (FIGS. 68 and 69B). On the other hand, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 86 (b), when the predetermined gaming state generated when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the hit result mode ends, the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed timer ( It is delayed by a predetermined time (wait time of 8 msec) by a delay means) (S8621 in FIG. 67, S8814 in FIG. 69A). By setting the delay timer, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game by the timer interrupt processing after the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game.

Further, as shown in the time chart of FIG. 87 (a), regardless of the state of the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (stop state, apparent fluctuation state during interruption, etc.), the special figure 2 variation display game A delay timer (wait time of 8 msec) may be set. As a result, in the timer interrupt process for performing the end process of the predetermined game state (the hit end process of FIGS. 53, 58, 67, 69A) that occurs when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the hit result mode, The special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 game processing cannot be started (FIGS. 19 and 64). Then, if the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied in the timer interrupt process after the end process of the predetermined game state, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are performed. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be started at the same time. It should be noted that, when the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory already exist at the timing of the end processing of the predetermined game state (when the configuration is such that the special figure 2 start memory is stored), or at this timing, the first start is performed. When there is a prize in the winning opening 36 and a winning in the second starting winning opening 37, the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 87 (b), when the special figure 2 variation display game has a hit result mode, the timer interrupt process after the end process of the predetermined game state is performed without setting the delay timer. If the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are started at the same time by the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. can.

Further, when one of the variable display games of Special Figure 1 and the variable display game of Special Figure 2 stops in the hit result mode, the remaining variable display game of the other is opposed to the variable display game of the other. Processing corresponding to the fluctuation time (value of the special figure game processing timer) may be performed (S8412 in FIG. 65). In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game end at the same timing and the winning result is derived at the same time.

For example, based on the remaining variable time of the other variable display game, the other variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the one variable display game that stops in the hit result mode. Whether or not it is determined (S8412 in FIG. 65). Specifically, in the special figure 2 game process executed after the special figure 1 game process for stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in the hit result mode, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game can be zero. It is determined whether or not (it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec in the special figure 1 changing process).

In addition, when there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variable display game stops in the hit result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game If the result mode of is the hit result mode, the interruption process of interrupting the special figure 2 variable display game and postponing the stop of the variable display within the special figure 1 game process (the special figure 1 changing process of FIG. 65) is performed. If the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the out-of-figure result mode, the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place in the special figure 2 game process (particularly, the special figure 2 variable display process of FIG. 66). Perform the process of stopping.

As in the time chart of FIG. 88 (a), in a situation where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may derive a hit result at substantially the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. It is possible to perform an interruption process to postpone the suspension of the fluctuation display. Then, the derivation of the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game is prioritized, and the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 1 variable display game starts first. After the end of the hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game is derived (the apparent fluctuation display during interruption is stopped), and the hit state by the special figure 2 variable display game (hit). Since the operation) starts, it does not disadvantage the player. During the hit state (hit operation) by the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started even if the special figure 1 start memory (special figure 1 hold) is present (result of A3501 in FIG. 21). Is "N").

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 88 (b), the special figure 2 variation display game ends at the same timing (within the same interrupt processing) as the special figure 1 variation display game for deriving the hit result (here, a small hit). In the case where there is a possibility, if the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the out-of-order result mode, the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game as it is in the out-of-order result mode is performed. Even if this deviation result mode is derived as it is, no problem occurs. Special Figure 2 When the process of stopping the variable display game in the out-of-order result mode is performed, the stop display time (time from the stop to the confirmation of the out-of-order result) in the out-of-order result mode is set as the hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game. If the setting is set to be the same as the stop display time (time from the stop to the confirmation of the hit result (start of fanfare)), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 89 and 90, when the game control device 100 (game control means) recovers from a power failure (power on) due to a power failure during the interruption of the other variable display game, the power failure occurs. After restoration (during restoration or after restoration), before the execution control of one of the fluctuation display games starts, an interrupted command (interrupted command) indicating that the other variable display game is suspended is issued as an effect control device. It may be transmitted to 300 (effect control means) (A1022 in FIG. 5B, B1305 in FIG. 73A). The effect control device 300 can grasp that the other variable display game is suspended and one variable display game is in the hit state (hit operation) by the interrupted command, and the decorative special figure of the one variable display game can be obtained. Corresponding processing such as the processing of displaying the winning symbol on the display device 41 (see the recovery screen display 1 of FIGS. 89 and 90) can be performed.

When the power failure is restored, the effect control device 300 may display a restoration screen (power failure restoration display) suggesting the restoration of the power failure on the display device 41. Then, when the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the main display (first display) is interrupted, after the power failure is restored, a command related to the control of the suspended decorative special figure variation display game is performed. The recovery screen may be closed when (command) is received. As commands related to the control of the decorative special figure variable display game, for example, a variable command related to the start of the decorative special figure variable display game (see FIG. 89) and a decorative special figure stop command related to the stop of the decorative special figure variable display game (Fig. See 90) and so on. Decorative special figure variation display on the side displayed in a size different from the main display (reduced display side, second display side) When a command related to the control of the game is received, the recovery screen is not terminated.

If you use the decorative special figure stop command to return to the normal screen after the recovery screen is finished, the default stop symbol may be used. In the case of a hit stop symbol, the default hit symbol according to the game value (number of rounds, etc.) of the hit state may be used. The background of the normal screen may correspond to a probability state or the like.

Before receiving the command related to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game of the main display, it is possible to receive the command related to the control of the decoration special figure variation display game on the non-main display side (reduced display side). However, if the recovery screen is closed at that time, a problem may occur. For example, even though the probability is low, if the recovery screen is closed and the normal screen is displayed at the start of the reduced display decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the player will be in a probable change state (time saving state). There is a risk of misunderstanding. Therefore, even if a command regarding a new fluctuation start of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game (here, decorative special figure 2) that is reduced and displayed as in the recovery screen display 2 of FIGS. 89 and 90 is received, the fluctuation is simply performed. It just starts the display, but does not exit the recovery screen.

The start storage means (for example, the game control device 100) stores the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game as start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition. It is possible. The start storage display control means (for example, the segment LED editing process or the main process of FIG. 70) displays the number of start memories stored in the start storage means in a predetermined start storage display area of the display device or display. This makes it possible to notify the player. Then, in the restoration screen after restoration in the display device 41, the effect control device 300 normally displays the number of start memories and the variation display of the variation display game restarted after the interruption (when other than the display of the restoration screen). It may be displayed in a state of higher transparency than. If the apparent fluctuation display is continued even during the suspension, the fluctuation display continued during the suspension may be displayed in a highly transparent state. Further, in the recovery screen, the fluctuation display displayed on the main display may be a fluctuation fluctuation.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the same embodiment (configuration) as that of the first embodiment can be applied.

[Game board]
FIG. 91 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The center case 40 has an inflow port 40c to the warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40a can roll. And are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 33, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning opening 36. It is easy to win a prize in the winning device 33. Further, a lamp display device 80 is provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. The lamp display device 80 displays the starting memory number and the like of each special figure variation display game.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 92) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 92) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a first start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided, and a normal variable winning device 33 is provided immediately below the first starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. Is provided. The normal variable winning device 33 includes a movable member 33c that converts a game ball into a state in which it can flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the front side. When the movable member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 33.

In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. It is configured to be memorized. Therefore, the Fuden winning opening (first starting winning area) is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the Fuden winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92). That is, the Fuden winning opening and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to a plurality of first starting winning regions, and at least a part of the first starting winning regions among the plurality of first starting winning regions is closed and open. It is configured as a normal variable winning device 33 having a movable member 33c that can be converted into.

In the second embodiment, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls to convert the movable member 33c of the normal variation winning device 33 into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the solenoid variation display game. (See FIG. 92). The movable member 33c of the ordinary variable winning device 33 is an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 33b. As the movable member 33c of the normal variable winning device 33, the movable member 33c is slid in the front-rear direction by the normal electric solenoid 33b to move forward and backward, so that the game ball can flow into the ordinary electric winning opening. Ordinary electric accessories may be provided. The game control device 100 rotates and opens the movable member 33c via the normal electric solenoid 33b when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, and the game ball is a normal fluctuation winning device. It is changed to an open state where it can flow into 33.

Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the game state, a time-saving state (general electric support (electric support) state) is generated.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (second start winning area) 37 that gives a start condition of the special figure 2 variation display game is provided. Further, a first special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 38 is provided on the left side of the second starting winning opening 37, and a second special variable winning device (upper) is provided above the second starting winning opening 37. Large prize opening) 39 is provided.

In the second embodiment, in the first special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 38, the sliding opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c, which is a tongue-shaped member, moves forward and backward to play the large winning opening. It is converted into a state in which the sphere can flow in (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-77362). The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening. Is to be given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The second special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 39 includes a movable member 39c that converts the game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the special variable winning device 39. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper large winning opening, thereby allowing the player. Is to be given a predetermined game value (prize ball).

The game control device (game control means) 100 can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined special result. In the second embodiment, the special gaming state includes a small hit (first special gaming state) that can occur when the small hit mode (first special result) is reached, and a big hit mode (second special result). It shall include the big hit (second special game state) that can occur when becomes.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It is possible to control the execution of the variable display game (first variable display game). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a first execution control means that performs such control.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (second start winning area) 37. It is possible to control. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a second execution control means that performs such control.

Further, as will be described later, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation (high probability of hit probability and high probability of hit) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the big hit (second special game state). It is possible to control the generation of a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with the probability of the game being supported. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 includes a specific game state generating means that performs such control.

General winning opening 35, 1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 37, normal variable winning device 33, 1st special variable winning device 38 large winning opening, and 2nd special variable winning device 39 large winning opening When the game ball wins a prize, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 92) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning prize opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 33 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like.

A ball guiding portion is provided on the upper right of the second special variable winning device 39. The ball guiding unit is a member that rolls a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area 32 in the lateral direction and guides the game ball to the second special variable winning device 39 or the like.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 59 that display information such as the current gaming state.

[Game control device]
FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game control device 100 according to the second embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration example of the control system of the game control device 100 in the second embodiment will be described, but unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the gate switch 34a is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The gate switch 34 is connected to the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121. The gate switch 34a detects the winning of the normal drawing start gate 34. Further, in the second embodiment, the normal electric solenoid 33b is provided for the game control device 100 of the first embodiment. The normal electric solenoid 33b is connected to the first driver 138a.

Then, as will be described later, when the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the game control device 100 drives the normal electric solenoid 33b to move the movable member 33c for a predetermined time. It is rotated and opened (for example, for 0.3 seconds) to change the game ball into an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to flow into the normally variable winning device 33.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning prize is obtained by winning the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. The structure is such that the memory is memorized. Therefore, the Fuden winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting opening 1 switch 36a.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the above-mentioned game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 93 summarizes each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state in each game state. In the second embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to a low probability, and controls so that there is no general electric support (electric support). Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the normal mode. Also, in the normal game state, it is recommended to hit left as the firing direction. Therefore, since the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game.

In the first specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls so that the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) is a high probability and the normal electric support is provided (the number of times of support is 50). That is, in the first specific gaming state, it can be said that the conversion control by the normal electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is controlled to be executed more than the normal gaming state, and the probability state is set to the high probability state. ..

Further, in the first specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the probabilistic mode. Further, in the first specific gaming state, it is recommended that the launching direction of the gaming ball be right-handed. Since it becomes easier to win a prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize in the Fuden winning opening, the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the second specific gaming state, the game control device 100 sets the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a high probability, and controls so that the normal electric support is not provided. That is, when the transition from the above-mentioned first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state is performed, the conversion control by the normal electric solenoid (conversion control means) 33b is returned to the same control as the normal gaming state, and the special figure is shown. It can be said that the probability state of is set to the high probability state (FIG. 96).

Further, in the second specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the small hit RUSH (rush). As will be described later, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set to a short time in the second specific gaming state, the small hit RUSH tends to generate small hits continuously in a short period of time, and is due to the small hit. It can be said that many prize balls can be obtained. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the second specific gaming state is executed, a small hit (first special result) is derived as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It is possible.

Further, in the second specific gaming state, it is recommended that the launching direction of the gaming ball be right-handed. Therefore, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the third specific gaming state, the game control device 100 controls the hit probability (the hit probability of the special figure) to be a low probability and to have the normal electric support (the number of times of support is 50). Further, in the third specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 sets the effect mode to the time saving mode. Further, in the third specific gaming state, it is recommended to hit the gaming ball to the right in the launch direction. Since it becomes easier to win a prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 by hitting right, the main starting area becomes the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game is executed by winning the prize in the Fuden winning opening, the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game.

Next, the transition (transition) from each gaming state will be described. It is assumed that a big hit (second special game state) occurs in the normal game state. When the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends.

When a normal jackpot occurs in the first specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends. Further, when a probability variation jackpot occurs in the first specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first specific gaming state again after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the Fuden support ends, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state (“high support regulation” in FIG. 93). "Number of times" is over. "High support" means that the probability of hitting is high and there is electric support).

That is, in the first specific gaming state, the transition condition to another gaming state is the case where the occurrence of a big hit (second special gaming state) is a condition (first transition condition), and the normal electric support for a predetermined number of times. (Execution of variable display game) may be a condition (second transition condition). By doing so, for example, the first specific gaming state can be generated after the occurrence of the big hit (second special gaming state) in the normal gaming state, but in this first specific gaming state, the above-mentioned When the second transition condition is satisfied, the second specific gaming state can be generated.

In the second specific gaming state, when the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot in the second specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the second specific gaming state to the third specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends. That is, in the second specific gaming state, the occurrence of a big hit (second special gaming state) is a condition as a condition for shifting to another gaming state.

When a probability variation jackpot occurs in the third specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the jackpot state ends. Further, when a normal jackpot occurs in the third specific gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the third specific gaming state again after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, in the third specific gaming state, when the big hit does not occur and the normal electric support ends, the gaming state shifts from the third specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (“low support specified number of times” in FIG. 93 is determined. "End". Note that "low support" means that the probability of hitting is low and there is electric support).

Since the gaming state shifts in this way, it is possible to shift the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state after the probability variation jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state. In the first specific gaming state, since the normal electric support is executed and the hit probability is set to a high probability, it is possible to easily generate a big hit. And it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if a big hit does not occur in the first specific gaming state, in the second embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state. In the second specific gaming state, although the Fuden support is not executed, the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed by winning a prize in the second starting port 37. Here, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 variable display game is set to a high probability unlike the special figure 1 variable display game (in FIG. 96 described later, the small hit probability is set to an extremely high probability). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, the "small hit RUSH" mode in which the small hit (first special gaming state) is frequently generated can be executed until the next big hit occurs. Then, since it is possible to increase the number of balls to be played in a gaming state other than the big hit (second special gaming state), it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having a novel gaming property.

In addition, in the first specific game state, there is a normal electric support, and in the second specific game state, there is no general electric support as in the normal game state, so a small hit (first special game state). It is possible to execute the second variable display game in which many are allocated at a good tempo.

In addition, by executing the special figure fluctuation display game in a state where the jackpot probability in the second specific gaming state is high, a jackpot (second special gaming state) is generated at an appropriate timing and the game is moved to another gaming state. The transition condition of is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an extreme increase in ball output due to the excessive continuation of the second specific gaming state.

Hereinafter, each process in the second embodiment will be described. The processing added in the second embodiment and the processing for which explanation is given again for easy understanding are given as "A ***" with a number in the 10,000s after the reference numeral "A".

[Timer interrupt processing]
The timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program) in the second embodiment. FIG. 94 shows that the process of step A11311 is added between step A1311 and step A1312 in FIG. Therefore, the processes from steps A1301 to A1311 and the processes from steps A1312 to A1315 have the same contents as those in FIG. 6, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A11311, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A11311). The details of the normal map game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

By doing so, in the second embodiment, the normal map variation display game can be executed. Then, when the normal fluctuation display game is a winning mode, the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 is opened, and the game ball wins in the general variable winning opening, so that the special figure 1 variable display game is played. Can be started.

In particular, in the first specific gaming state and the third specific gaming state, the Fuden support is executed (see FIG. 93). In the first specific game state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started frequently by the Fuden support (electric support), and the hit probability is high, so that a big hit is likely to occur. be able to. Further, even in the third specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be easily generated by the Fuden support.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3510) in the special drawing 1 normal processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 95A shows that the process of step A13718 is added after step A3717 in FIG. 23. Therefore, since the processes from steps A3701 to A3716 have the same contents as those in FIG. 23, the description thereof will be omitted.

Compared with the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, the content of the high probability fluctuation frequency update processing (A3717) is partially different, and the time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing (A13718) is newly added. Has been done.

The high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is a process for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the hit probability is high. The time reduction variation number update process (A13718) is a process of updating the time reduction variation number, checking the end of the Fuden support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high-probability variation frequency update process (A3717) and the time-saving variation frequency update process (A13718) in the second embodiment will be described later in FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3717) is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state with a high support specified number of times.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number update process (A13718) is executed in the special figure 1 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with a low support specified number of times.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal processing of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. In FIG. 95B, the process of step A13809 is added after step A3808 in FIG. 24. Therefore, since the processes from steps A3801 to A3808 have the same contents as those in FIG. 24, the description thereof will be omitted.

The high probability fluctuation number update process (A3808) is a process of managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a state where the hit probability is high. The time reduction variation number update process (A13809) is a process of updating the time reduction variation number, checking the end of the Fuden support, and setting necessary information. The details of the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (A3808) and the time reduction variation frequency update process (A13809) in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, respectively.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the high probability fluctuation number update process (A3808) is executed in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, it is possible to shift to the second specific gaming state with a high support specified number of times.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving variation number update process (A13809) is executed in the special figure 2 variation start process, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state with a low support specified number of times.

FIG. 96 is a table illustrating the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the missed probability, and the probability variation probability in the second embodiment. These tables are based on the above-mentioned big hit judgment process and small hit judgment process, such as big hit probability (probability that the judgment result becomes a big hit), small hit probability (probability that the judgment result becomes a small hit), and loss probability (the judgment result is out of order). Probability of becoming FIG. 96 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, FIG. 96 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state, and FIG. 96 (c) shows the probability variation inrush rate.

Also in the second embodiment, the jackpot probability (the probability of occurrence of a jackpot) is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. Further, the small hit probability (small hit occurrence probability) is the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. It is also possible to increase the small hit probability in the high probability state and decrease it in the low probability state. For example, in the low probability state, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variable display game may be set to "0". In addition, the probability of loss (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a jackpot mode (second special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game (first variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game). It includes a probability setting means that can control a low probability state in which the probability of deriving is set to a low probability and a high probability state in which a probability higher than this low probability state is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, the big hit probability is common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display in the special figure 2 variable display game. It is higher than the game, and the loss probability is lower in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game (in the high probability state, the loss probability of the special figure 2 variable display game is 0). Therefore, in the second specific gaming state, a small hit can be generated with an extremely high probability by winning a prize in the second starting winning opening 37.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 described above, in the low probability state, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a long-time fluctuation (long fluctuation). )become. However, in the high probability state, since the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has the fluctuation of the normal fluctuation time (short fluctuation compared to the long fluctuation). become. As a result, in the second specific gaming state in the high probability state, small hits are generated more frequently in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the low probability state, and more prize balls are obtained by the small hits (small hits). RUSH).

In the second embodiment, after the jackpot state ends, it becomes a probable change state or a normal state. As shown in FIG. 96 (c), the 16R probability variation inrush rate is 2% in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 Both variable display games are 60%. That is, the probability variation inrush rate is set to 62%. Then, after the big hit is completed, the time reduction of 50 rotations and the general electric support are executed.

The 16R probability variation inrush rate is, for example, 2% for the special figure 1 variable display game and 40% for the special figure 2 variable display game, and the 4R probability variation inrush rate is, for example, 60% for the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 may be set so that the distribution of the number of jackpot rounds in the probabilistic state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is different, such as 22% for the variable display game. With this configuration, if a probabilistic big hit is won in the small hit RUSH mode, it is possible to acquire a large number of game balls even during the big hit game, so that a larger number of small hits are generated during the small hit RUSH. In addition to improving the player's willingness to play a game ball, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for winning a probabilistic jackpot.

In addition, since the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot triggers the end of the small hit RUSH mode, the occurrence of the probabilistic jackpot may reduce the player's motivation to play, but it is possible to acquire a sufficient game ball even with this probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, while maintaining the player's motivation to play, it becomes possible to give a new motivation to play to rush into the small hit RUSH again.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the high-probability fluctuation frequency update processing (A3717 (special figure 1 fluctuation start processing), A3808 (special figure 2 fluctuation start processing)) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in the second embodiment. The details will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment. In the high-probability fluctuation count update process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure fluctuation display game starting in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability fluctuation count as the remaining number of fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A15101). When it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A15101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A15101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the high probability fluctuation number indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by -1 (1). (A15102). The initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later). ). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (A15103). When the high probability fluctuation count is not 0 (the result of A15103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 has a high probability fluctuation count. End the update process. When the number of high probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15103 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to high probability & no time reduction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15104).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure high probability & no time reduction flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15105), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation. The final fluctuation flag with high probability and no time reduction is set (A15106), and the high probability fluctuation count update process is terminated. The final fluctuation flag with high probability and no time reduction will be described later.

In this way, by executing the high probability fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the second specific gaming state (high probability) can be appropriately changed from the first specific gaming state (high probability, with electric support). , No electric support) (especially A15105).

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the time-saving fluctuation number update process (A13718 (special figure 1 variation start process)) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened (low probability & state with electric support) (A15201). If the time reduction is not in progress (the result of A15201 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) when the time reduction is in progress (low probability & state with electric support) (result of A15201 is “Y”). The initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is the number of fluctuations in which the time reduction mode is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (Special Figure 1 big hit end processing or special figure 2 in the second embodiment described later). Big hit end processing). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A15203). If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A15203 is "N"), that is, if the time reduction mode continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 performs the time reduction variation number update process. finish. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A15203 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to low probability & no time reduction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A15204).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A15205), and corresponds to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the fluctuation. The low probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag is set (A15206), and the time reduction frequency update process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time saving fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (low probability, no electric support) can be appropriately changed from the third specific gaming state (low probability, with electric support). ) (Especially A15205).

As described above, in the second embodiment, a part of the high probability fluctuation number processing in the first embodiment is changed, and the time saving fluctuation number update processing is added. Therefore, as the flags corresponding to the high-probability final fluctuation flag in the first embodiment, the high-probability & time-saving final fluctuation flag (A15106) and the low-probability & time-saving no final fluctuation flag (A15206) have been introduced.

In order to cope with such a change, in the second embodiment, the “high probability final variation?” Of steps A2714, A3515, A3608, A5728, A5745, A5828, and A5848 in the first embodiment is referred to as “final variation?”. Read as. The "final fluctuation" is the final fluctuation at which the low probability and time saving state ends, and when the low probability & no time saving final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation at the low probability and time saving state ends. When the high probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the final fluctuation in the high probability and time reduction state is completed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the "high probability medium?" In steps A2712, A3514, A3607, A5737, and A5837 in the first embodiment is read as "high probability or time saving medium?".

Further, in the second embodiment, "clearing the high probability fluctuation frequency region" in step A5907 in the first embodiment is read as "clearing the high probability fluctuation frequency region and the time saving fluctuation frequency region". Further, in the second embodiment, "clear the high probability final fluctuation flag area" in step A5909 in the first embodiment is read as "clear the final fluctuation flag area".

The "final fluctuation flag area" is a high probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag area that stores the high probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag, and a low probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag area that stores the low probability & no time reduction final fluctuation flag. Includes flag area.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 100 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A16701), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A16702). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (off data of one jackpot signal and off data of three jackpot signals) in the external information output data area (A16703).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16704). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (A16705). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability fluctuation determination data includes high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support). When the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16705), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16706). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16720. The processing after step A16720 will be described later.

After the process of step A16706, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16707). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16708). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A16709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game state display number area with high probability (A16710), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16711), and round LED pointer. The turn-off number is saved in the area (A16712). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A16713), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring organization flag area of the lower prize opening (A16714), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A16715).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16716). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, the hit probability can be set to a high probability and the public electric support can be executed. Then, in the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number (for example, 50 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency, and the time-saving fluctuation is saved in the time-saving fluctuation frequency region for holding the time-saving fluctuation frequency. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16717). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16718), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (A16719), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

In step A16705 described above, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16705), the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the start with low probability & time saving. Save in the external information output data area (A16720).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16721). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16722). After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16723).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability state in the game state display number area (A16724), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16725), and round LED pointer. Save the turn-off number in the area (A16726). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A16727), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud start period flag area of the lower prize opening (A16728), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A16729).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16730). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, the normal electric support and the time saving mode can be executed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Subsequently, the initial value of the low probability fluctuation number (for example, 50 times) is saved in the low probability fluctuation number region for holding the low probability fluctuation number, and the time reduction fluctuation is performed in the time reduction fluctuation frequency region for holding the time reduction fluctuation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16731). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16732), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is processed in the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the timer area (A16733), and the special figure 1 big hit end process is terminated.

By doing so, after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the hit probability can be determined. It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting a high probability and having a normal electric support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and there is general electric support. As a result, it is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 102 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing in the second embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing of the special figure 2 (A16801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A1682). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (off data of one jackpot signal and off data of three jackpot signals) in the external information output data area (A16803).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (A16804). Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (A16805). Here, in the second embodiment, the probability fluctuation determination data includes high probability data (high probability, with electric support) and low probability data (low probability, with electric support). When the probability fluctuation determination data is not low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“N” in step A16805), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving in the external information output data area. (A16806). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A16820. The processing after step A16820 will be described later.

After the process of step A16806, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16807). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16808). After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A16809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game state display number area with high probability (A16810), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16811), and round LED pointer. The turn-off number is saved in the area (A16812). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A16813), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring organization flag area of the lower prize opening (A16814), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A16815).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16816). As a result, in the first specific gaming state, the hit probability can be set to a high probability and the public electric support can be executed. Then, in the first specific gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently executed in a high probability state. Subsequently, the initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number (for example, 50 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for holding the high-probability fluctuation frequency, and the time-saving fluctuation is saved in the time-saving fluctuation frequency region for holding the time-saving fluctuation frequency. The initial value of (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16817). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16818), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is terminated.

In step A16805 described above, when the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) (“Y” in step A16805), the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the start with low probability & time saving. Save in the external information output data area (A16820).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A16821). Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with low probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A16822). After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A16823).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability state in the game state display number area (A16824), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A16825), and round LED pointer. Save the turn-off number in the area (A16826). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A16827), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud start period flag area of the lower prize opening (A16828), and the special figure status. Clear the area (A16829).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A16830). As a result, in the third specific gaming state, the normal electric support and the time saving mode can be executed. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game can be frequently generated. Subsequently, the initial value of the low probability fluctuation number (for example, 50 times) is saved in the low probability fluctuation number region for holding the low probability fluctuation number, and the time reduction fluctuation is performed in the time reduction fluctuation frequency region for holding the time reduction fluctuation number. The initial value of the number of times (for example, 50 times) is saved (A16831). After that, the probability information (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A16832), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is terminated.

By doing so, after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)), the hit probability can be determined. It is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state by setting a high probability and having a normal electric support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and the normal electric support is provided. , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 103 shows that the process of step A17207 is added between steps A7207 and A7208 in FIG. 58. Therefore, since the processes from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processes from steps A7208 to A7210 have the same contents as those in FIG. 58, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened (A17207). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (the result of A17207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A7208. On the other hand, when the time is shortened (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the processes after step A7210 are executed.

By doing so, if the hit probability is not high and the time is not shortened, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in the second embodiment. FIG. 104 shows that the process of step A17308 is added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 59. Therefore, the processes from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processes from steps A7309 to A7310 have the same contents as those in FIG. 59, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened (A17308). Then, when the game control device 100 determines that the time reduction is not in progress (the result of A17308 is "N]), the processing after step A7309 is executed. On the other hand, when the time reduction is in progress (the result of A17308 is" Y "). , Special figure 2 The small hit end process is completed.

By doing so, if the hit probability is not high and the time is not shortened, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 1 Big Hit End Processing (Modified Example in the Second Embodiment)]
A modified example of the second embodiment of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 105 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 1 jackpot end process in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 106 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 1 big hit end process in the second embodiment.

105 and 106 are the processes in FIGS. 99 and 100, in which the processes of steps A19719 to A19723 and the processes of steps A19733 to A1973 are added. Therefore, the processes of steps A16701 to A16718 and steps A16720 to A16732 have the same contents as those of FIGS. 99 and 100, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19719, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (A19719). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19719 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (A1972), and the special figure 2 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 The game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19723), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A19719 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Prepare as a command (A19720) and execute the effect command setting process (A19721). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the processes of steps A19722 and A19723 described above are executed to end the special figure 1 big hit end process.

Further, in step A19733, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (A1973). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19703 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area where the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (A19736), and the special figure 2 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 The game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A19737), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A19733 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decoration special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. Prepare as a command (A19734) and execute the effect command setting process (A19735). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the processes of steps A19736 and A19737 described above are executed to end the special figure 1 big hit end process.

It can be said that FIGS. 105 and 106 are modified so that the modified example of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 big hit end processing in the first embodiment, it has the following effect in the second embodiment. That is, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with electric support)) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to high probability. At the same time, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state with the presence of Fuden support. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with electric support) after the end of the special figure 1 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and the normal electric support is provided. , It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special Figure 2 Big Hit End Processing (Modified Example in the Second Embodiment)]
A modified example of the second embodiment of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 107 is a first flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process in the second embodiment. Further, FIG. 108 is a second flowchart showing a modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end process in the second embodiment.

107 and 108 are the processes in FIGS. 101 and 102 to which the processes of steps A19819 to A19722 and the processes of steps A19833 to A19836 are added. Therefore, the processes of steps A16801 to A16818 and steps A16820 to A16832 have the same contents as those in FIGS. 101 and 102, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A19819, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (A19819). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19819 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (A19822), and the special figure 1 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of A19819 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19822) and execute the effect command setting process (A19821). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the process of step A19822 described above is executed to end the special figure 2 big hit end process.

In step A19833, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (A19833). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A19833 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area where the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (A19836), and the special figure 1 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of A19833 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (A19834) and execute the effect command setting process (A19835). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the process of step A19836 described above is executed to end the special figure 2 big hit end process.

It can be said that FIGS. 107 and 108 are modified so that the modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 big hit end processing in the first embodiment, it has the following effect in the second embodiment. That is, when the probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is not low probability data (high probability data (high probability, with Fuden support)) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the hit probability is set to high probability. With the electric support, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state. In addition, when the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is low probability data (low probability, with normal power support) after the end of the special figure 2 big hit, the hit probability is set to low probability and the normal power support is provided. It is possible to shift to the third specific gaming state.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 small hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 109 shows that the process of step A17207 is added between step A7207 and step A7208 in FIG. 69A. Therefore, the processes from steps A7201 to A7207 and the processes from steps A7208 to S8814 have the same contents as those in FIG. 69A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A17207, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is being shortened (A17207). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (the result of A17207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A7208. On the other hand, when the time is shortened (the result of A17207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step S8810.

It can be said that FIG. 109 is a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not shortened, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Special Figure 2 Small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modification of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 110 shows the process of step A17308 added between steps A7308 and A7309 in FIG. 69B. Therefore, the processes from steps A7301 to A7308 and the processes from steps A7309 to S8914 have the same contents as those in FIG. 69B, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A17308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is being shortened (A17308). Then, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (the result of A17308 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A7309. On the other hand, when the time is shortened (the result of A17308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A8911.

It can be said that FIG. 109 is a modification of the special figure 1 small hit end process in the first embodiment so as to be applicable to the second embodiment. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end processing in the first embodiment, the following effect is obtained. That is, by the above processing, when the hit probability is not high and the time is not shortened, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state in which the firing direction is left-handed.

[Public game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A11310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal drawing game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A17601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 monitors the input from the general electric winning opening switch for detecting the winning (winning) to the winning opening (general electric winning opening) of the ordinary variable winning device 33. Is executed (A17602). In the second embodiment, unlike the conventional case, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed or the special figure 1 start winning memory is stored by winning a prize in the Fuden winning opening. Therefore, the Fuden winning opening is included in the category of the first starting winning opening 36, and the Fuden winning opening switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a. The details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the game processing timer is not 0 (A17603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A17604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A17604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A17605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set game sequence branch table of the game (A17606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the normal figure game processing number is executed (A17607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A17607, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The normal process for setting the information necessary for performing the process during the change of the normal map is executed (A17608). The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 114.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process (the normal map changing process). A17609). The details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 116.

Further, when the game processing number is "2" in step A17607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit. Execution of the normal map display processing (A17610), which sets the opening time, sets the information necessary for performing the normal drawing processing, and the like. The details of the processing during display of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A17607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during the normal drawing, or sets the information necessary for performing the processing of the remaining ball of the normal power. The middle process per figure is executed (A17611). The details of the processing during normal drawing will be described later in FIG. 118.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A17612). ). The details of the processing of the remaining spheres in the normal figure will be described later in FIG. 120.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A17607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A17608). (A17613). The details of the normal end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A17614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A17615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A17604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A17614.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A17601 in the normal map game process shown in FIG. 111.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A17701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A17702). Here, the right-handed gaming state is a big hit state, a first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state, and a third specific gaming state. In the case of a right-handed gaming state (the result of A17702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A17705. When the game state is not right-handed (the result of A17702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A17703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A17704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing the left-handed to be left-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A17705). When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A17705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved regular figures by +1 (A17706), and corresponds to the number of reserved regular figures after the update. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A17707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (A17708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A17709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A17701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A17705 is "N"). N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (A17602) in the Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. As described above, the general electric winning port switch is included in the category of the starting port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 92).

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, that is, whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 33 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. (A17801). Then, when it is hitting the normal figure (the result of A17801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the general electric winning opening switch (A17802). When there is an input to the Fuden winning slot switch (the result of A17802 is "Y"), the count number of the Fuden counter is updated by +1 (A17803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 6) (A17804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit value (the result of A17804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded in the RWM. It is saved in the control pointer area during the normal drawing (A17805).

Finally, the Fuzu game processing timer is cleared (A17806), and the Fuden winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, if there is a winning prize of the normal power above the upper limit value during the hitting state of the normal drawing, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the normal variable winning device 33 is closed. It is made so that the hit state of the normal figure ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hit by a normal figure (the result of A17801 is "N"), and when it is determined that there is no input to the general electric winning slot switch (the result of A17802 is "N"). ) Or, if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (the result of A17804 is "N"), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A17608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A17901). If the number of reserved numbers is not 0 (the result of A17901 is "N"), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM. The hit symbol random number is loaded from (for 1 hold number), and the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) after loading are cleared to 0 (A17902). ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal high probability (high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal electric support state). (A17903). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A17903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A17904). , When the high probability of the normal map is in progress (the result of A17903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure is set (A17905), and the step A17906 is performed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A17906). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step A17908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A17906 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A17907).

When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A17907 is "Y"), that is, when the hit random number is missed, the game control device 100 saves the hit flag area (A17908). Further, the missing stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A17909), the missing symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A17910), and the process proceeds to step A17914.

When the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A17907 is "N"), that is, when the hit is hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A17911) and converts it into the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (A17912), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A17913), and the process proceeds to step A17914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and in this embodiment, there are three (1 per normal figure, 2 per normal figure, 3 per normal figure).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A17914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A17915), and shifts the random number storage area per normal figure. (A17916), after clearing 0 in the free space after the shift (A17917), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (A17918).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 hold of the normal figure in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of hold the normal figure is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A17919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves the variation pattern in the game processing timer area (A17920). For example, the fluctuation time is distributed to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. Then, the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map is executed (A17921), and the normal process of the normal map is terminated. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map will be described later.

Further, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing of the normal drawing when the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (the result of A17901 is "Y") (A17922). , Save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A17923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A17924), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map. The process transition setting process during normal map fluctuation is executed in step A17921 in the normal map normal process shown in FIG. 114.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A18101), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A18102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A18103), and the normal figure fluctuation display game is changing. The changing flag indicating that the signal is changing is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the normal figure (A18104). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (A18105), and the initial value (here) in the ordinary figure fluctuation symbol number area. Then save 0) (A18106). After that, the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A17609) in the normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" (A18301) as a setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and saves the process number in the normal map game process number area (A18302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (A18303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal diagram (the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A18304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (A18305), and the normal map fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (A17610) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during display of a normal map.

First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing of the normal drawing (A18401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A18402). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A18403).

When the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A18403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A18404), and hits corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information. The start pointer value (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per normal figure) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal figure (A18405). Further, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per normal figure) is acquired and saved in the normal figure stop pointer area (A18406). Next, the normal power opening time (here, the value corresponding to each of 1, 2, and 3 per normal figure) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 33 in the probable change state or the time saving state (during the normal electric support state) is set, and the opening can be performed three times or twice, for example.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal drawing (A18408), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (A18409). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game (the signal related to the normal symbol 1 is turned on) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (the signal related to the normal electric accessory 1 being operated are turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A18410). Further, on-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (on) the general-purpose solenoid 33b (A18411).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal variable winning device 33 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 33 (A18412), and determines the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 33 during the normal variable winning device 33. Clear the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the Fuden to be stored (A18413). Finally, a flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 33 is saved in the Fudoden fraud monitoring period flag area (A18414).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A18403 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing (A18415). , Save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A18416). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A18417), and the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (A17611) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the normal drawing.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (A18601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during hitting the normal figure is the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (hit end). It is determined whether or not the value of) has been reached (A18602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (the result of A18602 is "N"), the game control device 100 controls during hitting the normal figure. Update the pointer by +1 (A18603). Further, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A18604), and the normal process is terminated. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

Further, when the value of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting), the game control device 100 determines that (the result of A18602 is "Y"). Process during normal drawing in step A18603 The process for setting the transition to normal electric operation is executed (A18604) without executing the process for updating (+1) the control pointer area, and the process during normal drawing is terminated.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A18604) in the normal process per figure will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 33b for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 33, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A18701). Here, the control pointer uses the value before the update in step A18603. If the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 2, and 5, the process proceeds to step A18702 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 33, so that the normal variable winning device 33 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the blockage is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 33b (A18703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is any one of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 corresponds to the control pointer because the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A18704 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 33. The normal electric power opening time (for example, 1700 msec), which is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 33, is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18704). Further, on-data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 33b (A18705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A18706 and controls the opening of the normal variation winning device 33, so that the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power opening time (for example, 2600 msec), which is the opening time of 33, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (A18706). Further, on-data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 33b (A18707), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is any of 4 and 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A18708, ends the opening control of the normal variable winning device 33, and processes the remaining ball of the normal electric power ( In order to execute A17612), "4" is set as the processing number (A18708), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area (A18709).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18710). After that, in order to set the normal power solenoid 33b to off, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (A18711), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining spheres]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (A17612) in the Fuzu game processing will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing the remaining spheres of the normal electric power.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number "5" related to the end process per normal figure (A18901), and saves the process number in the normal figure game process number area (A18902). After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A18903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variation winning device 33 (the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A18904). Subsequently, the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 33 is cleared (A18905), and further, the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (A18906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A18907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end process (A17613) in the per-figure game process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per normal drawing.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "0" related to the normal drawing normal processing (A19101), and further saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (A19102). After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game (the middle signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A19103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 33 in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A19104), and then ends the normal figure hit process. To finish.

[Action and effect of the second embodiment]
Hereinafter, the operation and effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a time chart of the operation of the first special variable winning device 38 in the small hit RUSH. In FIG. 122, in order to explain the operation of the first special variation winning device 38 in the second specific gaming state, the execution state and the stop state of the special figure 2 variation display game (described as “special figure 2 game”) are shown. The execution state of the small hit operation, the open / closed state of the lower large winning opening (the winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38), and the state of the game ball in the vicinity of the opening / closing door of the lower large winning opening are shown.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small hit (first special gaming state) is generated, the sliding opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c of the first special winning device 38 is changed from the closed state to the open state. Convert. The first special winning device 38 has a configuration in which the game ball stays on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is in the closed state. Further, when the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is in the open state, the game ball staying on the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c is configured to be able to win a prize. As a result, even in a small hit with a short open state, the game ball staying in the opening / closing door (opening / closing member) 38c can win a lot of game balls by winning the first special winning device 38, and the second It is configured so that the number of balls can be efficiently increased in the specific game state of.

In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the above-mentioned small hit RUSH occurs in the second specific gaming state, the fluctuation is started every time the second starting winning opening 37 is won. As shown in FIG. 96 above, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 is set extremely high regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and in the second specific gaming state, the special figure 2 is set. Fluctuation display The fluctuation of the game is set to short fluctuation. Therefore, small hit operations will occur one after another.

When a small hit occurs, the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times (for example, eight times) for each small hit. During the small hit operation (first special gaming state), the open state time of the lower large winning opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is set shorter than the closed time. For example, the closing time of the lower prize opening can be 1.2 seconds, while the opening time can be 0.2 seconds.

The special variable winning device unit constituting the first special variable winning device 38 has a configuration in which the flow force of the game ball on the opening / closing door 38c is weakened (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-77362). As a result, the game ball tends to stay on the opening / closing door 38c.

In such a configuration, when a small hit RUSH in which small hits occur frequently occurs, the closed state time of the lower large winning opening is set longer than the open state time, so that it is often in the closed state time. The game ball can be retained on the opening / closing door 38c. After that, since the opening / closing door 38c is opened, many game balls staying on the opening / closing door 38c will win a prize at once in the lower prize opening. As a result, when a small hit RUSH occurs, many prize balls can be given to the player.

By doing so, in the probabilistic loop type gaming machine 10 as in the second embodiment, the small hit RUSH can be executed in the second specific gaming state after exiting the first specific gaming state. It is possible to realize a new playability that the more you fit in, the more you can get a game ball.

In addition, to explain with reference to FIG. 122, when a small hit occurs in a predetermined variable display game and a small hit occurs in the next variable display game of the predetermined variable display game, the next variable display game Depending on the fluctuation period of the identification information, it is possible to secure a period for ensuring the flow and retention state of the game ball. As a result, when the small hit operation continues for two games, the game ball can be retained on the opening / closing door 38c by utilizing the fluctuation time of the later game. Then, many game balls staying on the opening / closing door 38c can be made to win a prize at once in the lower prize opening, and many prize balls can be given to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first specific gaming state after the end of the big hit (second special gaming state), the small hit mode (small hit mode). Since the transition to the second specific gaming state in which the first special result) can be derived can be performed, it is possible to perform a novel gaming state transition that has never existed before. Further, according to the gaming machine 10 in the second embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game (second variable display game) to which a large number of small hits are allocated can be efficiently changed.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 138. The configuration not described in the third embodiment can be applied to the configuration common to the first embodiment.

Further, the third embodiment targets the game board 30 of FIG. 2 (note that the modified examples described later are excluded). Then, when one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a winning result, the case of forced termination in which the other variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result is dealt with. The same applies to the case of interruption / resumption instead of forced termination.

In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory, second start memory, special figure 2 hold) is accumulated up to an upper limit value (for example, 4) larger than 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 start prize will not be invalidated during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the big hit. Therefore, the special figure start port 2 switch process, the special figure 2 normal process, and the fluctuation start information setting process are changed from the first embodiment as follows.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the start port 2 signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 2 switch 37a is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 (A3001). Further, the value of the number of output times of the loaded start port 2 signal is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (A3003).

If the output count does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the RWM start port 2 signal output count region (A3004). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3015 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3015). If the number of reserved special figures 2 is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3015 is “N”), the special figure start port 2 switch processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 hold number is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3016), and sets the special figure 2 hold number by +1. Update (A3017). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 corresponding to the reserved number of the special figure 2 (A3018), and the big hit random number prepared by the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM. Save to (A3019). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3020), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3021). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3022). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM (. A3023).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure hold information determination process (pre-reading process, advance determination process) for determining the special figure hold information (A3024), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number indicating the special figure 2 hold number. A command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3025), an effect command setting process is executed (A3026), and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. In this way, when the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) is generated, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

In the third embodiment, the special figure reservation information determination process is also executed for the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) generated based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37. Become. Therefore, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) and the look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) for the special figure 2 start memory (special figure 2 hold) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. ..

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing 2 normal processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 normal process (A3311) in the special figure 2 game process. The processes other than steps A3605a and A3605b are the same as those of the special figure 2 normal process (FIG. 22) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3605), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3605a). , The effect command setting process is executed (A3605b).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. The processing other than steps A5021, A5022, and A5023 is the same as the fluctuation start information setting processing (FIG. 36) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"), that is, when the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 hold number is updated by -1 (). A5021), the content of the random number storage area related to the special figure 2 variation display game is shifted (A5022), the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the variation start information setting process is completed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The processing other than A4308a-1 is the same as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (FIG. 29A) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A4308a, in step A4308a-1, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state are saved. As a result, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (big hit state) as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high probability state or normal gaming state (low probability state)) and the jackpot symbol, the special figure 1 effect mode and the special figure 2 effect mode after the end of the jackpot by the special figure 1 variable display game Etc. will be set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The processing other than A4308b-1 is the same as the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (FIG. 29B) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A4308a, in step A4308b-1, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state are saved. As a result, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information after the end of the big hit (big hit state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game are set. That is, based on the current probability state (high probability state or normal gaming state (low probability state)) and the jackpot symbol, the special figure 1 effect mode and the special figure 2 effect mode after the end of the jackpot by the special figure 2 variable display game Etc. will be set.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The processing other than A4402 is the same as the special figure 1 information setting processing (FIG. 30) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A4402, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode information. Therefore, in the case of not a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, in the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) includes the special figure 1 effect mode number. It will be set according to the mode information. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern, which is a variation mode, particularly includes information on the variation time. The details of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game will be described later (FIG. 137 (B)). As will be described later, the special figure 1 effect mode information (particularly the special figure 1 effect mode number) changes according to the number of executions (number of fluctuations, number of rotations, number of games) of the special figure 1 variation display game. The variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The processing other than step A4502 and the added step A4506a is the same as the special figure 2 information setting processing (FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A4502, unlike the first embodiment, the game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode information. Therefore, in the case of the high probability state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second fluctuation display game) is set according to the special figure 2 effect mode information including the special figure 2 effect mode number. Will be. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern, which is a variation mode, particularly includes information on the variation time.

It should be noted that, in the normal gaming state, in the high probability state, the special figure 2 variation display game has a long variation (long variation time) variation pattern due to the latter half offset data (A4507) for long-term variation. FIG. 2 The variation display game basically has a variation pattern of short variation (short variation time, for example, 1 sec). However, even in the high-probability state, when reach occurs and in the case of high-probability final fluctuation (final fluctuation in the high-probability state), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is long and medium compared to the short fluctuation. The fluctuation time is (for example, 20 sec). Moderate fluctuation times shall be shorter than long fluctuations (eg, 10 minutes). The details of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game will be described later (FIG. 137 (B)).

In step A4506a, after step A4505 or A4506, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 effect mode number is a special mode number (here, a specific number 50). When the special figure 2 effect mode number is a special mode number (here, the specific number 50) (the result of A4506a is "Y"), the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure 2 effect mode information in step A4502. Set the fluctuation pattern selection information table. As will be described later, the special figure 2 effect mode information (particularly the special figure 2 effect mode number) changes according to the number of times the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (number of fluctuations, number of rotations, number of games). 2 The variation pattern of the variation display game is set according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game.

Further, the game control device 100 changes for a long time only when the special figure 2 effect mode number is not the special mode number (here, the specific number 50) (the result of A4506a is "N"). Set the latter half offset data for (A4507). Therefore, as will be described later, after the end of the probabilistic state (ST), the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is within a predetermined number of times, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a long fluctuation (long fluctuation time, even in the normal gaming state). The fluctuation pattern of (for example, 10 minutes) is not set, but the fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation (short fluctuation time, for example, 1 sec) is set. Here, the predetermined number of times is the upper limit value “4” of the special figure 2 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number at the end of the probability change.

As a result, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal gaming state, the special drawing based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the probabilistic state (specific gaming state) (the establishment of the second starting condition). A short-time variation pattern can be set for the 2 variation display game, that is, for the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) generated during the probability variation state. ..

Temporarily, in the normal gaming state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), a long-time fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with respect to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the probability change state. When is set, there is a possibility that the player stops the game and leaves the game machine 10 and a big hit of this special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unmanned state (the possibility of an unmanned big hit). , There are problems such as disadvantages for the player. However, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots by setting a short-time fluctuation pattern for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the probability change state.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display (second half portion) of the special figure 1 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 display process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process. The processing other than steps A5743a and A5753a-A5753e is the same as the processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment (FIG. 43), and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit, the game control device 100 has a special figure 1 effect relating to the setting of the special figure 1 effect mode which is the effect mode related to the special figure 1 variation display game after step A5743. The mode information check process is executed (A5743a), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is executed (A5744). Further, even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process after step A5753 (A5753a). The details of the special figure 1 effect mode information check process will be described later.

After step A5753a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed (special figure 1 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode number (A5753b), and sets the special figure 1 effect. It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed (the number of remaining games in the special figure 1 effect) and the remaining number of rotations in preparation for switching in the special figure 1 match (A5753c). The remaining number of rotations for special figure 1 switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes among the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes, or may be a value (rotational speed) among the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes. The same value (rotational speed) may be used in any of the effect modes, or the same value (rotational speed) may be used in all the effect modes among the plurality of special figure 1 effect modes.

The game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5754 when the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (the result of A5753c is "N").

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 1 switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5753c is "Y"), the game control device 100 issues a special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command. (A5753d), the effect command setting process (A5753e) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step A5754. The special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a specific effect such as a look-ahead effect from being performed several times before the special figure 1 effect mode is switched (before several games). By receiving the special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command as a command for switching the effect mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effect across a plurality of special figure 1 effect modes (single-shot command processing). B1317, B1318).

As an alternative, in step A5753b, the total number of remaining rotations for switching preparation (total number of remaining games for switching) corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode number is set, and in step A5753c, the total number of remaining rotations for effect (total number of remaining games for effect). ) And the total number of revolutions remaining in preparation for switching may be determined. In this way, the effect control device 300 performs a look-ahead effect by receiving the special figure 1 effect mode switching preparation command before the number of games in which the total remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes zero and the probable change state shifts to the normal game state. It can be prohibited (B1317, B1318 of single-shot command processing). The total remaining rotation speed of the effect is the number of rotations remaining until the effect mode is changed with respect to the total number of rotations (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Special Figure 1 Production Mode Information Check Processing]
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special drawing 1 effect mode information check process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 effect mode information check process (A5743a, A5753a) in the special figure 1 display process. The special figure 1 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is other than a big hit (small hit or miss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure primary mode transition information is a non-update code (A20101). When the special figure primary mode transition information is a code without update (the result of A20101 is "Y"), the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the special figure 1 effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. For example, the special figure 1 effect mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Is selected.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the special figure primary mode transition information is not an update-free code (the result of A20101 is "N"), the special figure 1 variation display game is in a high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). ) Is determined (A20102). When the special figure 1 variable display game is started in a high probability state (the result of A20102 is "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game required until the effect mode is changed. The total number of rotations remaining for the production (total number of games remaining for the production) is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A20103). Since the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine in the present embodiment, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of continuous games) in which the high-probability state is continued. It is set to 50 times, the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value)). The number of continuations is the number of times that can be continued, and when a big hit occurs, the high probability state ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0, that is, whether or not the high probability state (probability variation state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20104). When the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is not 0 (the result of A20104 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues, the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20104 is "Y"), that is, when the high probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20107.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not started in the high probability state (the result of A20102 is "N"), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the normal gaming state. The game control device 100 updates the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 1 effect, which is the rotation speed (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game required until the change of the special figure 1 effect mode, by -1 (A20105). 1 It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (A20106). The remaining rotation speed of the special figure 1 effect is the remaining rotation speed until the special figure 1 effect mode is changed regarding the rotation speed (execution number of times) of the special figure 1 variation display game. If the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 1 effect is not 0 (the result of A20106 is “N”), the special figure 1 effect mode information check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 1 effect becomes 0 (the result of A20106 is "Y"), that is, when the special figure 1 effect mode is changed from the next special figure 1 variable display game, the game control device. 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table (A20107), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure primary mode transition information (A20108).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the special figure 1 effect mode number of the special figure 1 effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 1 effect mode number area in the RWM (A20109), and shifts to the special figure 1 effect. Obtain the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the mode, save it in the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A20110), and use it at the end of the special figure 1 effect mode to be transferred this time. The special figure primary mode transition information to be performed is acquired and saved in the special figure primary mode transition information area in the RWM (A20111).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect mode number as an effect command (A20112), and executes the effect command setting process (A20113). Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A20114), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2015). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) of the new special figure 1 effect mode as an effect command (A2016), and prepares an effect command setting process (A201717). ) Is executed. Since it is not necessary to set the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) in the new special figure 1 effect mode after the end of the probabilistic change state, the processes of steps A2016 and A2017 may not be executed.

The probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the big hit state (special game state), the presence / absence of the time reduction (Public electric support), the effect mode information, and the like. In this embodiment, since there is no ordinary variable winning device 33 and there is no time reduction (Public power support), the probability information command does not have to include information on the presence or absence of the time reduction (Public power support).

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 1 effect mode is a left-handed mode (A20181), and if it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A2018 is "N"), an effect mode information check process is performed. finish. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A201818 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A201119), the effect command setting process is executed (A20120), and the effect mode is executed. The information check process ends.

Through the above processing, the effect control device 300 that has received the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) executes the probability information setting processing that sets the probability state and performs the processing corresponding to the probability state. (B1313, B1314 of single-shot command processing). Further, the effect control device 300 that has received the effect rotation speed command can set the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed in the new special figure 1 effect mode, and thereafter receives the decorative special figure 1 stop command as a command for stopping the symbol. Each time the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed is updated by -1 (decreased by 1), the subsequent special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed can be managed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect according to the switching (end) of the special figure 1 effect mode, or perform the effect of notifying the switching before the switch of the special figure 1 effect mode. Further, the effect control device 300 that has received the high probability variation number command (initial value) can set the high probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 1 effect mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command can display the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed on the display device 41.

As described above, the game control device 100 is independent of the special figure 2 effect mode, and the special figure 1 is in accordance with the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed corresponding to the rotation speed (execution speed) of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is possible to manage the effect mode and execute the game control corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode during the stay. Then, the effect control device 300 that has received the command corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode generates the specific effect only in the specific special figure 1 effect mode, and the effect corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode during the stay. It becomes possible to control the execution of the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the transition from the high probability state to the normal gaming state is managed by the total remaining rotation speed of the effect, not by the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 1, no problem occurs.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display (second half portion) of the special figure 2 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 display process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process. The processes other than steps A5846a and A5856a-A5856e are the same as the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment (FIG. 44), and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit, the game control device 100 has a special figure 2 effect relating to the setting of the special figure 2 effect mode, which is the effect mode related to the special figure 2 variation display game, after step A5846. The mode information check process is executed (A5846a), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is executed (A5847). Further, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process after step A5856 (A5856a). The details of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process will be described later.

After step A5856a, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed (special figure 2 switching preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode number (A5856b), and the special figure 2 effect. It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed (the number of remaining games in the special figure 2 effect) and the remaining rotation speed in preparation for switching in the special figure 2 match (A5856c). The number of rotations remaining in preparation for switching to the special figure 2 may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the effect modes among the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes, or may be a value (rotational speed) among the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes. The same value (rotational speed) may be used in any of the effect mode, or the same value (rotational speed) may be used in all the effect modes among the plurality of special figure 2 effect modes.

When the game control device 100 does not match the rotation speed remaining in the effect of the special figure 2 and the rotation speed remaining in the preparation for switching in the special figure 2 (the result of A5856c is “N”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5857.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed and the special figure 2 switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5856c is "Y"), the game control device 100 issues a special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command. (A5856d), the effect command setting process (A5856e) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step A5857. The special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a specific effect such as a look-ahead effect from being performed several times before the special figure 2 effect mode is switched (before several games). By receiving the special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command as a command for switching the effect mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the effect across a plurality of special figure 2 effect modes (single-shot command processing). B1317, B1318).

As an alternative, in step A5856b, the total number of remaining rotations for switching preparation (total number of remaining games for switching) corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode number is set, and in step A5856c, the total number of remaining rotations for effect (total number of remaining games for effect). ) And the total number of revolutions remaining in preparation for switching may be determined. In this way, the effect control device 300 performs a look-ahead effect by receiving the special figure 2 effect mode switching preparation command before the number of games in which the total remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes zero and the state changes from the probabilistic state to the normal game state. It can be prohibited (B1317, B1318 of single-shot command processing). The total remaining rotation speed of the effect is the number of rotations remaining until the effect mode is changed with respect to the total number of rotations (number of executions) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Special figure 2 production mode information check processing]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 effect mode information check process (A5846a, A5856a) in the special figure 2 display process. The special figure 2 effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is other than a big hit (small hit or miss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure secondary mode transition information is a non-update code (A20201). When the special figure secondary mode transition information is a code without update (the result of A20201 is "Y"), the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the special figure 2 effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. For example, the special figure 2 effect mode in which the high probability state continues until the next big hit. Is selected.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the special figure secondary mode transition information is not an update-free code (the result of A20201 is "N"), the special figure 2 variation display game is in a high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). ) Is determined (A20202). When the special figure 2 variable display game is started in a high probability state (the result of A20202 is "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game required until the effect mode is changed. The total number of remaining rotations of the production (total number of remaining games of the production), which is the total number of rotations, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A2203). In the present embodiment, since the gaming machine is an ST machine, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining number of rotations for the effect is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of high-probability fluctuations (initial value)). It is set.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0, that is, whether or not the high probability state (probability variation state, small hit RUSH state) has ended (A20204). When the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is not 0 (the result of A20204 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues, the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated. On the other hand, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, when the high probability state ends, the process proceeds to step A20207.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not started in the high probability state (the result of A2022 is "N"), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the normal gaming state. The game control device 100 updates the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect, which is the rotation speed (number of executions) of the special figure 2 variation display game required until the change of the special figure 2 effect mode, by -1 (A20205). 2 It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (A20206). The remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect is the remaining rotation speed until the special figure 2 effect mode is changed regarding the rotation speed (execution number of times) of the special figure 2 variation display game. If the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect is not 0 (the result of A20206 is “N”), the special figure 2 effect mode information check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect becomes 0 (the result of A20206 is "Y"), that is, when the special figure 2 effect mode is changed from the next special figure 2 variation display game, the game control device. 100 sets the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A20207), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 2 secondary mode transition information (A20208).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the special figure 2 effect mode number of the special figure 2 effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the special figure 2 effect mode number area in the RWM (A20209), and shifts to the special figure 2 effect. Obtain the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the mode, save it in the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A20210), and use it at the end of the special figure 2 effect mode to be transferred this time. The special figure secondary mode transition information is acquired and saved in the special figure secondary mode transition information area in the RWM (A20211).

In addition, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, when the high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) is completed, the special figure of transition in step A20209. The special figure 2 effect mode number of the 2 effect mode becomes the number of the special mode (here, the specific number 50), and the special figure 2 effect mode shifts to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value “4” of the special figure 2 hold number (A3015 in FIG. 123). .. The remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect may be set to the current number of reserved special figures 2 at the end of the high probability state (probability change state). Therefore, in the special mode, after the high probability state ends, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game is within a predetermined number of times (here, the upper limit value “4” of the special figure 2 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number at the end of the probability change). Continue until.

As a result, in the normal game state immediately after the end of the high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), the game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the high probability state. When executing, as a special mode, it is possible to execute a game control different from the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the normal game state. For example, as described in FIG. 129 described above, immediately after the end of the high probability state (probability change state), the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation (long fluctuation time) is set even in the normal gaming state in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Instead, a variation pattern of short variation (short variation time) is set. Therefore, in the normal gaming state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the gaming machine 10, and the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unmanned state. The possibility (the possibility of unmanned jackpot) can be reduced.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 effect mode number as an effect command (A20212), and executes the effect command setting process (A20213). Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A20214), and the effect command setting process is executed (A20215). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) of the new special figure 2 effect mode as an effect command (A20216), and prepares the effect command setting process (A20217). ) Is executed. Since it is not necessary to set the high probability variation number (initial value) in the new special figure 2 effect mode after the end of the probability change state, the processes of steps A20216 and A20217 may not be executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the new special figure 2 effect mode is a left-handed mode (A20218), and if it is not a left-handed mode (the result of A20218 is "N"), an effect mode information check process is performed. finish. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A20218 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A20219), the effect command setting process is executed (A20220), and the effect mode is executed. The information check process ends.

Through the above processing, the effect control device 300 that has received the probability information command indicating the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) executes the probability information setting processing that sets the probability state and performs the processing corresponding to the probability state. (B1313, B1314 of single-shot command processing). Further, the effect control device 300 that has received the effect rotation speed command can set the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed in the new special figure 2 effect mode, and thereafter receives the decorative special figure 2 stop command as a command for stopping the symbol. Each time, the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect is updated by -1 (decreased by 1), and the subsequent remaining rotation speeds of the special figure 2 effect can be managed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can switch the effect according to the switching (end) of the special figure 2 effect mode, or perform the effect of notifying the switching before the switch of the special figure 2 effect mode. Further, the effect control device 300 that has received the high probability variation number command can set the high probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 2 effect mode. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command can display the left-handed instruction display instructing the left-handed on the display device 41.

As described above, the game control device 100 is independent of the special figure 1 effect mode, and the special figure 2 corresponds to the rotation speed (execution number) of the special figure 2 variation display game according to the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect. It is possible to manage the effect mode and execute the game control corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode during the stay. Therefore, in the normal gaming state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the special mode can be set until all the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the probability change state is completed. .. Further, during the special mode according to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game (for example, four times after the probability change state ends), the special figure based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) generated during the probability change state. 2 By setting a short-time fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots.

Further, the special figure 2 effect mode can be managed independently of the special figure 1 effect mode, and the effect control device 300 that has received the command corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode can be specified only in, for example, a specific special figure 2 effect mode. It is possible to control the execution of the effect corresponding to the special figure 2 effect mode during the stay, such as generating the effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the transition from the high-probability state to the normal game state is managed not by the remaining rotation speed of the special figure 2 effect but by the total remaining rotation speed of the effect, the high-probability state ends if only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. There is no problem of not doing it.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5726, A5826) in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process. The processing other than steps A5916-A5918 is the same as the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (FIG. 45) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A5915, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 (for example, “1”) in the special figure 1 effect mode number area and the special figure 2 effect mode number area (A5916). Then, the special figure 1 effect remaining rotation speed area, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed area, and the total effect remaining rotation speed area are cleared (A5917). Subsequently, the no-update code is saved in the special figure primary mode transition information area and the special figure secondary mode transition information area (A5917), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is terminated. In this way, the effect mode 1 during the big hit state is set before the big hit state starts.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process. The processing other than steps A6715a-A6715l is the same as the special figure 1 big hit end processing (FIG. 53) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6715, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A6715a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A6715b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A6715c). In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit state, the small hit RUSH state (probability change state) is set. Therefore, the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number here are the small hit RUSH mode (small hit RUSH mode). It is a number (for example, "2" and "12") corresponding to the probability variation mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect after the end of the big hit state (A6715d). As described above, in the present embodiment, the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is a predetermined number of rotations (or the number of games) in which the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) continues (for example, 50 times, the number of high probability fluctuations (initial)). Value)) is set. Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A6715e). Here, the special figure secondary mode transition information is information for shifting to the special mode after the end of the probability change state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (high probability) corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (small hit RUSH mode, indicating probability variation mode) as an effect command (A6715f), and prepares the effect command. Execute the setting process (A6715g). Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A6715h), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6715i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) after the end of the big hit as an effect command (A6715j), and executes the effect command setting process (A6715k). Here, the high probability fluctuation number (initial value) is the same as the above-mentioned total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value), and is a predetermined rotation speed (or game number) in which the probability variation state (small hit RUSH state) continues. It is set to the number of times (for example, 50 times). In addition, in this embodiment, since it is a single small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) during the probability change state and the effect mode does not change, the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) and the high probability fluctuation number (initial value). Is the same as. However, when the effect mode is finely changed even during the probability change state, the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) may be set smaller than the high probability fluctuation number (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are cleared (A6715l), and the process proceeds to step A6716.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process. The processing other than the steps A6815a-A6811l is the same as the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 54) of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6815, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A6815a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A6815b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308b-1 of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process of step A6815c-A6815l, and shifts to the process of step A6816. Since the processing of steps A6815c-A6815l has the same contents as the processing of steps A6715c-A6715l of the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Example of transition to production mode]
FIG. 137 (A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode according to the third embodiment. The transition of the effect mode is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123-136 described above.

When the game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → probability change state → normal game state, the special figure 1 production mode is in the order of big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) → normal mode. Transition. In addition, in the probable change state after the end of the special gaming state, the total remaining number of rotations of the effect decreases in response to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it reaches zero, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 131).

In addition, even during the normal gaming state, every time the remaining number of rotations of the special figure 1 effect decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation number), the special figure 1 The effect mode shifts in the order of normal mode A → normal mode B → normal mode C → normal mode D → normal mode E → normal mode F → ... (See FIG. 131). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 increases by 100 after the end of the probability change state.

As an example, the special figure 1 effect mode numbers of the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the normal mode A, the normal mode B, the normal mode C, the normal mode D, the normal mode E, and the normal mode F are 1 respectively. From 8. The special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately assigned.

In addition, when the game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → probability change state → normal game state, the special figure 2 production mode is the big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) → special mode (special). It shifts in order like the production mode). In addition, in the probable change state after the end of the special gaming state, the total remaining number of rotations of the effect decreases in response to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it reaches zero, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 133).

In addition, even during the normal game state, every time the remaining number of rotations of the special figure 2 effect decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number), the special figure 2 The effect mode shifts in the order of special mode → normal mode G → normal mode H → normal mode I → normal mode J → normal mode K → ... (See FIG. 133). In the special mode (special effect mode), when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 becomes larger than the upper limit of "4" (or the number of holds in the special figure 2 at the end of the probability change) after the end of the probability change state, it is normal. Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches 200 after the end of the probability change state, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 increases by 100.

As an example, the special figure 2 effect mode numbers of the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the special mode, the normal mode G, the normal mode H, the normal mode I, the normal mode J, and the normal mode K are 1, respectively. 12, 50, 14-18. The special figure 2 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately assigned.

Since the special figure 1 effect mode and the special figure 2 effect mode are independently determined, the effect control device 300 is a special figure 1 effect mode in the display device 41, the board effect device 44 (movable accessory), and the like. FIG. 1 There may be a problem as to which of the effect of the variable display game and the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 effect mode is prioritized (preferred). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 gives priority (preferred treatment) to the effect of the special figure variation display game determined in advance as shown in FIG. 137 (A).

In the small hit RUSH mode (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the second starting winning opening 37 (FIG. 2), and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning opening 36. Since the main variable display game is a special figure 2 variable display game, the production of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol (sub). Display) or not displayed.

On the contrary, in the normal mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 5 or more), the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2), and the secondary starting area is the second starting. Since it is the winning opening 37 and the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game, the production of the special figure 1 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol (sub display). Or not displayed.

In the special mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 1 to 4), the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2), but the small hit RUSH mode (probability changing state). ) The special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 hold) generated during) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although the game is in a normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred) so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol (sub display). Or not displayed.

[Variation time]
FIG. 137 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation time according to the third embodiment. The control of the fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the control of FIGS. 123-136 described above.

In the probabilistic state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, the variation time of the special figure 1) is 60 sec of a long time (which may be said to be a medium time) (A4411). In the probabilistic state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has no reach, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time does not change even with a high probability final fluctuation, so that the special figure 1 fluctuation time may be fixed. Since the special figure 1 fluctuation time is a long time, when the high probability final fluctuation is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, it can be obtained in the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) or the big hit state before the probability change state. It is possible to secure a time for displaying the number of prize balls and the like on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300. Further, the stop display time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be lengthened only in the high probability final variation to secure this time.

In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation time) differs depending on the presence or absence of reach, and is 3 sec when there is no reach, as compared with the case where there is no reach. It will be a long 20 sec or more (A4402). The higher the expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time of the normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, but the SP reach is longer than 20 sec. In the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 fluctuation time does not depend on whether or not the special figure 2 effect mode is the special mode.

Further, in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (that is, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2) is 1 sec for a short time in the basic case (when there is no reach and when there is no high probability final fluctuation). (A4502). However, when there is a reach, the fluctuation time in FIG. 2 is medium 20 sec or more, which is longer than that of the short fluctuation. The higher the expectation of the reach system (type), the longer the fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time of the normal reach (N reach) is 20 sec, but the SP reach is longer than 20 sec. Also, the moderate variation time is shorter than the long variation (eg 10 minutes).

Further, in the case of a high-probability final fluctuation started in a probabilistic state, if there is no reach, the fluctuation time in FIG. 2 is a medium 20 sec, which is longer than 1 sec in the case of no high-probability final fluctuation (high probability). It is not limited to this if it is longer than the case where it is not the final fluctuation). In the case of a high-probability final fluctuation started in a probabilistic state, if there is a reach, the fluctuation time in Special Figure 2 is 20 sec or more, which is longer than the short fluctuation, as in the case of no high-probability final fluctuation. .. In this way, since the special figure 2 fluctuation time is a medium time, when the high probability final fluctuation is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) or the big hit before the probability change state. It is possible to secure a time for displaying the number of prize balls obtained in the state on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300. Further, the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game may be lengthened only in the high probability final variation to secure this time.

In the normal gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (that is, the variation time of the special figure 2) differs depending on whether or not the special figure 2 effect mode is the special mode (A4506a, A4502). In the special mode, even in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is the same as the special figure 2 fluctuation time in the probabilistic change state (provided that it is not a high-probability final fluctuation) (note that it is about the same). If there is, it may be different). That is, in the special mode, the special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1 sec for a short time when there is no reach, and when there is a reach, it is a medium 20 sec or more, which is longer than the short fluctuation, but the long fluctuation. Shorter than (eg 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal gaming state after the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the player stops the game and leaves the gaming machine 10, and the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs in an unmanned state. The possibility (the possibility of unmanned jackpot) can be reduced.

In the normal gaming state when not in the special mode, the fluctuation time in Special Figure 2 is a longer fluctuation time (10 minutes) than in the case of the special mode or the probabilistic change state. In this way, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a long fluctuation time (long fluctuation), the special figure is due to the big hit or the small hit generated in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game during the long fluctuation. 2 The variable display game will be forcibly removed and stopped. As a result, unless the special figure 2 effect mode is a special mode, the profit that the player right-hands in the normal gaming state is reduced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 138 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition of the display device 41 when the small hit RUSH mode in the probabilistic state is changed to the normal mode via the special mode in the third embodiment.

In (a), the effect mode display 680 indicating the effect mode is displayed as "rush mode" indicating the small hit RUSH mode. As shown in FIG. 137 (A), in the probabilistic state (small hit RUSH state, small hit rush state), the display device 41 gives priority (preferential treatment) to the production of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display. Since the production of the game is prioritized (preferred), this "rush mode" is displayed as the special figure 2 production mode.

Further, in (A), in the probabilistic state, the special figure 2 variable display game by winning a prize in the second starting winning opening 37, which is the main starting area, is enlarged and displayed (main) in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. Display) is being executed. In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game by winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 36, which is a secondary starting area, is stopped as a reduced display (sub display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, and is out of alignment. The stop symbol "4, 1, 5" is displayed small. In addition, the special figure variation display game by winning a prize in the main start area may be called a main variation display game (main variation special map), and the special figure variation display game by winning a prize in the slave start area is a follow variable display game. It may be called (subordinate fluctuation special figure). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is changing here is a high-probability final fluctuation (final fluctuation in a probabilistic change state).

The first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the special figure 2 variable display game execution state. The second predetermined image 676 showing the above figure 2 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). The second predetermined image 676 "◯" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game is not currently displayed. On the other hand, in the second display unit 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game is used as the hold display before digestion. Four are displayed. These four special figures 2 hold display 630a correspond to the hold that occurred in the high probability state before the high probability final change. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b is displayed as a start memory display (changing hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed. Even if the special figure 1 hold occurs, the special figure 2 hold display 630a is given priority (preferential treatment) over the special figure 1 hold display 620a on the display screen, and the special figure 1 hold display 620a is displayed on the first display unit 620. Does not have to be displayed.

Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

Next, in (i), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the high probability final fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation display area 610, and the out-of-order stop symbol "3, 4, 6" of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is largely displayed. At the same time, the probability change state (small hit RUSH state) ends. The second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game changes to the symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Other displays are the same as (A).

Subsequently, in (c), the normal gaming state is entered after the probability change state, but as shown in FIG. 137 (A), the special figure 1 effect mode shifts from the small hit RUSH mode to the normal mode A, and the special figure 2 The production mode shifts from the small hit RUSH mode to the special mode. Then, since the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred), the effect mode display 680 is displayed as a "chance zone" indicating a special mode. Since it is in a normal gaming state, a left-handed display for recommending left-handed to the player may be displayed.

Further, in (c), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the hold generated based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state (the establishment of the second starting condition) is in the normal gaming state. Start. However, since it is a special mode, as described above, the fluctuation time (special figure 2 fluctuation time) of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes), for example, a short time when there is no reach. It is 1 sec, and if there is a reach, it is a medium 20 sec, which is long compared to short fluctuations.

Further, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the player hits the left in the normal gaming state, and the hold is generated based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (the establishment of the first starting condition). The special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to is started. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. As described above, in the special mode, although it is in the normal gaming state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is prioritized (preferred), and the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. It is executed as a magnified display (main display). On the other hand, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed as a reduced display (sub-display) in the variable display area 613 at the left end. In this way, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game has a symbol “○”, and the second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game has a symbol “○”. It has become.

In the second display unit 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a is shifted to the right, and three special figure 2 hold displays 630a are displayed. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b is displayed as a start memory display (changing hold display) corresponding to the start memory related to the running special figure 2 variable display game. In the reserved digestion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b is displayed with priority (preferential treatment) over the special figure 1 hold display as the variable hold display. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "3".

Subsequently, in (e), the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the out-of-order stop symbol “8, 1, 3” of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in large size. The second predetermined image 676 changes to the symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Other indications are the same as (u).

After that, similarly, the hold generated based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state is digested twice, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed twice. During this time, the special mode continues.

Next, in (O), the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the last hold generated based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 in the high probability state starts in the normal gaming state. However, since it is a special mode, as described above, the fluctuation time (special figure 2 fluctuation time) of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than the long fluctuation (for example, 10 minutes), for example, a short time when there is no reach. It is 1 sec, and if there is a reach, it is a medium 20 sec, which is long compared to short fluctuations.

The first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game has a symbol “○”, and the second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game has a symbol “○”. It has become. In the second display unit 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a before digestion is not displayed. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 2 hold display 630b (changing hold display) is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "0".

Subsequently, in (ka), the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the out-of-order stop symbol “5,7,2” of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in large size. Then, the special mode ends. The second predetermined image 676 changes to the symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Other indications are the same as (O).

Next, in (ki), the normal mode after the end of the special mode starts in the normal game state. In the normal game state after the end of the special mode, the special figure 1 variable display game is given priority (preferred), and the special figure 1 variable display game that is continuing from (u) is displayed in the central part of the display screen. It is executed as an enlarged display (main display) in the area 610. On the other hand, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed as a reduced display (sub-display) in the variable display area 615 at the right end.

In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, there is one special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game as a hold display before digestion. It is displayed. In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 1 hold display 620b is displayed as a variable hold display. Even if the special figure 2 hold occurs, the special figure 1 hold display 620a is given priority (preferred) over the special figure 2 hold display 630a on the display screen, and the special figure 2 hold display 630a is displayed on the second display unit 630. Does not have to be displayed.

[Modified example of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. In this modification, the same configuration as that of the third embodiment described above is applied to the second embodiment, but the configuration not described in this modification is the configuration of the third embodiment. A configuration common to the configuration of the second embodiment (including the configuration of the first embodiment not described in the second embodiment) is also applicable. Although not described below, the controls of FIGS. 123-127, 130, 132, 134 and the like described above can also be applied to the modified examples.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 139 summarizes each game state, and shows the control by the game control device 100, the control by the effect control device 300, and the features in the game state in each game state. In this modification, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a specific gaming state A, and a specific gaming state B.

FIG. 139 corresponds to FIG. 93 of the second embodiment, but in the modified example of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 is obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the ordinary variable winning device 33. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed instead of the variable display game.

The normal gaming state is the same as the normal gaming state of FIG. 93 of the second embodiment. The specific gaming state A (probability variation state, small hit RUSH state) is the same as the second specific gaming state in FIG. 93. The specific game state B (time saving state) is basically the same as the third specific game state in FIG. 93, but in this modified example, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed by winning a prize in the general electric winning opening. Therefore, the main variation special map (main variation display game) is the special figure 2 variation display game. Further, in FIG. 139, there is no specific gaming state corresponding to the first specific gaming state of FIG. 93.

When a probability variation jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state B (time saving state), the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state A after the jackpot state ends. Further, since the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) is continued until the next big hit, the high probability fluctuation number update process does not have to be executed.

[Game board]
FIG. 140 is a front view of the game board 30 in the modified example of the third embodiment. In FIG. 140, the position of the normal variable winning device 33 is changed from FIG. 91 of the second embodiment, and the normal variable winning device 33 is above the second starting winning opening 37 and the second special variable winning device 39, that is, the first. 2 It is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the specific game state B (time saving state), even if the game ball wins a prize in the winning opening (Public winning opening) of the normal variable winning device 33 frequently due to the Fuden support and a small hit occurs, a small hit occurs. Occasionally, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are substantially prevented from winning.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process according to the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 141 is the same as FIG. 128 except for the contents of step A4401.

In step A4401 of FIG. 141, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a time saving state or a high probability state. If it is neither a time saving state nor a high probability state (in the case of a normal gaming state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4402 and subsequent steps. In the case of a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A4408 and subsequent steps.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process according to the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 142 is the same as FIG. 129 except for the contents of step A4501.

In step A4501 of FIG. 142, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a time saving state or a high probability state. In the case of a time saving state or a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A4502 and subsequent steps.

If it is neither in the time saving state nor in the high probability state (in the case of the normal game state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4504 and subsequent steps, and the special mode 2 production mode number is a special mode number (here, a specific number). If it is not 50) (the result of A4506a is "N"), a variation pattern of long variation (long variation time, for example, 10 minutes) is set in the special figure 2 variation display game. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 effect mode number is a special mode number (here, the specific number 50) (the result of A4506a is "Y"), the special figure 2 variation display game seems to be shorter than the long variation. A variation pattern of short variation (short variation time, for example, 1 sec) will be set (step A4502 or later).

[Special Figure 1 Production Mode Information Check Processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing 1 effect mode information check process according to the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 143 is the same as FIG. 131 except for the contents of steps A20102 and A2016.

In step A20102 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). Special Figure 1 Variable Display Game and Special Figure 2 Fluctuations Required Before Changing the Production Mode When the Special Figure 1 Variable Display Game is started in a time-saving state or a high-probability state (the result of A20102 is "Y"). The total production remaining rotation speed, which is the total rotation speed of the display game, is updated by -1, and it is determined whether or not the total production remaining rotation speed is 0 (A20103, A20104). In this modification, at the start of the time saving state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of times of time saving fluctuation (initial value)) which is the number of continuations of the time saving state. .. The number of continuations is the number of times that can be continued, and when a big hit occurs, the time saving state ends.

However, in this modification, since the gaming machine 10 is not an ST machine, the number of times the high-probability state can be continued is infinite until the next big hit, and if it does not become a big hit, the high-probability state starts (at the end of the big hit). ), The total number of remaining rotations of the effect is set to an impossible huge number of times (for example, 50,000 times). As a result, in the high probability state (probability change state), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect does not become 0, the special figure 1 effect mode does not change until the next big hit, and the small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) is maintained. At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect can be set to about 100 times, and the gaming machine 10 can be used as the ST machine. In addition, even if the special figure primary mode transition information is set to a non-update code (the result of A20101 is "Y") immediately before the start of the high probability state (at the end of the big hit), the high probability state is continued until the next big hit. good.

In the time saving state, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20104 is "Y"), that is, when the time saving state (Public electric support) ends, the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 effect mode shifts. The effect mode number and the like are set (A20107-A20120).

In step A2016 of FIG. 143, the game control device 100 uses a time-saving variation number command or a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the time-saving variation number (initial value) or high-probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 1 effect mode. Is prepared as a production command. Subsequently, the effect command setting process (A20117) is executed. Since it is not necessary to set the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value) or the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 1 effect mode after the time reduction state or the probability change state ends, the processes of steps A2016 and A2017 are executed. You don't have to.

[Special figure 2 production mode information check processing]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 effect mode information check process according to the modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 144 is the same as FIG. 132 except for the contents of steps A2022 and A20216 from FIG. 132.

In step A20202 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the time saving state or the high probability state (probability change state, small hit RUSH state). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is started in the reduced working hours state or the high probability state (the result of A2022 is "Y"), the total production remaining rotation speed is updated by -1, and the total production remaining rotation speed is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (A2203, A20204).

In this modification, at the start of the time saving state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of times of time saving fluctuation (initial value)) which is the number of times the time saving state can be continued. There is. On the other hand, at the start of the high probability state (at the end of the big hit), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is set to an impossible number of times (for example, 50,000 times). As a result, in the high probability state (probability change state), the total remaining rotation speed of the effect does not become 0, the special figure 2 effect mode does not change until the next big hit, and the small hit RUSH mode (probability change mode) is maintained. Even if the special figure secondary mode transition information is set to a non-update code (the result of A20101 is "Y") immediately before the start of the high probability state (at the end of the big hit), the high probability state is continued until the next big hit. good.

In the time saving state, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, when the time saving state (Public electric support) ends, the special figure 2 of the special figure 2 effect mode shifts. The effect mode number and the like are set (A20207-A20220).

It should be noted that, in the time saving state, when the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (the result of A20204 is "Y"), that is, when the time saving state is completed, the special figure 2 effect mode is shifted in step A20209. The 2 effect mode number becomes the number of the special mode (here, the specific number 50), and the special figure 2 effect mode shifts to the special mode. Then, in step A20210, the special figure 2 effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect mode (special mode) to be shifted becomes the upper limit value “4” of the special figure 2 hold number (A3015 in FIG. 123). .. The remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the special figure 2 effect may be set to the current special figure 2 hold number at the end of the time saving state. Therefore, the special mode continues until the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game is within a predetermined number of times (here, the upper limit value “4” of the special figure 2 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number at the end of the time reduction). do.

As a result, in the normal game state immediately after the end of the time saving state, the game control device 100 is normally set as a special mode when executing the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the time saving state. It is possible to execute a game control different from that of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the special figure 2 start winning memory generated in the game state. For example, based on FIG. 142 described above, immediately after the end of the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation (long fluctuation time) is not set in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game even in the normal gaming state, and the short fluctuation (short fluctuation) is not set. The fluctuation pattern of time) is set.

In step A20216 of FIG. 144, the game control device 100 uses a time-saving variation number command or a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the time-saving variation number (initial value) or high-probability variation number (initial value) of the new special figure 2 effect mode. Is prepared as a production command. Subsequently, the effect command setting process (A20117) is executed. Since it is not necessary to set the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value) or the number of high probability fluctuations (initial value) in the new special figure 2 effect mode after the time reduction state or the probability change state ends, the processes of steps A20216 and A20217 are executed. You don't have to.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (A3214) in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 145 is a first flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing according to the modified example of the third embodiment. Further, FIG. 146 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing according to the modified example of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 145, the processing of steps A16717a-A16717l is executed between steps A16717 and A16718, except that A16706, A16708, A16716, and A16717 are the same as those of FIG. 99 of the second embodiment. The process of step A16717a-A16717l is basically the same as that of step A6715a-A6715l of FIG.

Since there is no general electric support in the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), in FIG. 145, the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the start with high probability and no time reduction in step A16706. Save to the data area. In step A16708, a signal relating to a high probability & no time saving start is saved in the test signal output data area. In step A16716, the high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. In step A16717, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation number (for example, 50,000 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number, but the initial value of the time saving fluctuation number is not saved.

In FIG. 145, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table after step A16717 (A16717a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A16717b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, and are information for shifting to the probable change state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16717c). Here, since the judgment of A16705 results in a small hit RUSH state (probability variation state) after the end of the big hit state (the result of step A16705 is "N"), the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 1 effect mode number here, and , The special figure 2 effect mode number is a number corresponding to the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) (for example, "2" and "12").

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect after the end of the big hit state (A16717d). As described above, in this modification, since the gaming machine 10 is not an ST machine, the number of times the high-probability state can be continued is infinite unless it becomes a big hit. Therefore, at the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), The total number of remaining rotations is set to an impossible huge number of times (for example, 50,000 times). Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A16717e). Since the high probability state continues until the next big hit, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information may be set to the non-update code as described above.

The processing of the next step A16717f-A16717l is the same as that of step A6715f-A6715l in FIG. 135, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 146, the process of steps A16731a-A16731l is executed between steps A16731 and A16732, except that the process is the same as that of FIG. 100 of the second embodiment.

After step A16731, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 effect mode information address table and the special figure 2 effect mode information address table (A16731a). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information is acquired (A16731b). The special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are set in step A4308a-1 of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, and are information for shifting to the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode number (A16731c). Here, since the time is shortened after the end of the big hit state due to the determination of A16705 (the result of step A16705 is "Y"), the special figure 1 effect mode number and the special figure 2 effect mode here are used. The number is a number (for example, "32" and "42") corresponding to the time saving state (time saving mode).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the total remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect after the end of the big hit state (A16731d). As described above, in this modification, the total remaining rotation speed of the effect is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value)) which is the continuous rotation speed (or the number of games) in the time saving state. .. Then, the special figure primary mode transition information and the special figure secondary mode transition information regarding the effect mode after the end of the big hit state are acquired and saved (A16731e). Here, the special figure secondary mode transition information is information for shifting to the special mode after the end of the time saving state.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (low probability) corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (indicating the time saving mode) as an effect command (A16731f), and executes the effect command setting process. (A16731g). Then, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) is prepared as an effect command (A16731h), and the effect command setting process is executed (A16731i).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number (initial value) after the end of the big hit as an effect command (A16731j), and executes the effect command setting process (A16731k). Here, the time reduction fluctuation number (initial value) is the same as the above-mentioned total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value), and is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) which is a continuous rotation speed (or game number) in the time reduction state. It is set to the number of time reduction fluctuations (initial value). In this modification, since the time saving mode is a single time saving mode and the effect mode does not change, the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) and the time saving variation number (initial value) are the same. However, when the effect mode is finely changed even during the time reduction state, the total effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) may be set smaller than the time reduction variation number (initial value).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 effect mode transition information and the special figure 2 effect mode transition information are cleared (A16731l), and the process proceeds to step A16732.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (A3317) in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a first flowchart showing a procedure of special FIG. 2 jackpot end processing according to a modified example of the third embodiment. Further, FIG. 148 is a second flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing according to the modified example of the third embodiment.

In FIG. 147, the processing of steps A16817a-A16817l is executed between steps A16817 and A16818, except that A16806, A16808, A16816, and A16817 are the same as those in FIG. 101 of the second embodiment. The process of step A16817a-A16817l is the same as the process of step A16717a-A16717l of FIG. 145, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Since there is no general electric support in the specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state), in FIG. 147, the game control device 100 outputs a signal regarding the start with high probability and no time reduction in step A16806. Save to the data area. In step A16808, a signal relating to a high probability & no time saving start is saved in the test signal output data area. In step A16816, the high probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. In step A16817, the initial value of the high probability fluctuation number (for example, 50,000 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number, but the initial value of the time saving fluctuation number is not saved.

In FIG. 148, the process of step A16831a-A16831l is executed between steps A16831 and A16832, except that the process is the same as that of FIG. 102 of the second embodiment. The process of step A16831a-A16831l is the same as the process of step A16731a-A16731l of FIG. 146, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Example of transition of production mode (variation example)]
FIG. 149 (A) is a diagram showing an example of transition (transition, change) of the effect mode according to the modified example of the third embodiment. The transition of the effect mode is performed based on the control of FIGS. 141-148 described above.

The game state shifts in the order of special game state (big hit state) → specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) → special game state (big hit state) → specific game state B (time saving state) → normal game state. In this case, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts in the order of big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) → big hit mode → time saving mode → normal mode. In addition, in the time saving state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the total remaining rotations corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the number decreases to zero, the special figure 1 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 143).

In addition, even during the normal gaming state, every time the remaining number of rotations of the special figure 1 effect decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 1 variation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation number), the special figure 1 The effect mode shifts in the order of normal mode A → normal mode B → normal mode C → normal mode D → normal mode E → normal mode F → ... (See FIG. 143). For example, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 increases by 100 after the end of the probability change state.

As an example, the special figure 1 effect mode number of the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the normal mode A, the normal mode B, the normal mode C, the normal mode D, the normal mode E, the normal mode F, and the time saving mode are 1 to 8 and 32, respectively. The special figure 1 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately assigned.

In addition, the game states are in the order of special game state (big hit state) → specific game state A (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) → special game state (big hit state) → specific game state B (time saving state) → normal game state. When shifting, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts in the order of big hit mode → small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode) → big hit mode → time saving mode → special mode (special effect mode). In addition, in the time saving state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the total remaining rotation of the production corresponding to the increase in the total number of executions (total number of fluctuations) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the number decreases to zero, the special figure 2 effect mode shifts (see FIG. 144).

In addition, even during the normal game state, every time the remaining number of rotations of the special figure 2 effect decreases and becomes zero in response to the increase in the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation number), the special figure 2 The effect mode shifts in the order of special mode → normal mode G → normal mode H → normal mode I → normal mode J → normal mode K → normal mode L → ... (see FIG. 144). In the special mode (special effect mode), when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 becomes larger than the upper limit of "4" (or the number of holds in the special figure 2 at the end of the probability change) after the end of the time saving state, it is normal. Switch to mode G. The normal mode G continues until the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches 100 after the end of the probability change state, and after the normal mode G, the normal mode is switched every time the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 increases by 100.

As an example, the special figure 2 production mode of the big hit mode, the small hit RUSH mode (probability variation mode), the time saving mode, the special mode, the normal mode G, the normal mode H, the normal mode I, the normal mode J, the normal mode K, and the normal mode L. The numbers are 1, 12, 42, 50 and 43-48, respectively. The special figure 2 effect mode number is not limited to this, and can be appropriately assigned.

In this modification, the effect control device 300 gives priority (preferred treatment) to the effect of the special figure variation display game determined in advance as shown in FIG. 137 (A).

In the small hit RUSH mode (probability change state, small hit RUSH state) and the time saving mode, the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the second starting winning opening 37 or the normal variable winning device 33, and the secondary starting area is the first starting winning. Since it is the mouth 36 and the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game, the production of the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the small hit RUSH mode or the time saving mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol. Displayed (sub-display) or not displayed.

On the contrary, in the normal mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 5 or more), the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2), and the secondary starting area is the second starting. Since the winning opening 37 or the normal variable winning device 33 and the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game, the production of the special figure 1 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the normal mode, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol (sub display). Or not displayed.

In the special mode (normal game state in which the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 is 1 to 4), the main starting area in which the game ball should be won is the first starting winning opening 36 (FIG. 2), but the special feature generated during the time saving state. FIG. 2 The special figure 2 variable display game based on the start winning memory (special figure 2 hold) is mainly executed. Therefore, in the special mode (special effect mode), although it is in the normal game state, the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game is given priority (preferential treatment). For example, in the display device 41, in the special mode, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged by a large symbol (main display, normal display), and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is reduced by a small symbol (sub display). Or not displayed.

At the start of the high-probability state (at the end of the big hit), it is possible to set the total remaining rotation speed of the effect to about 100 times as an initial value and use the gaming machine 10 as the ST machine. After the end of the probability change state (small hit RUSH state), the special figure 1 effect mode may enter the normal mode, and the special figure 2 effect mode may enter the special mode.

[Variation time (variation example)]
FIG. 149 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation time according to the modified example of the third embodiment. The control of the fluctuation time as the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the control described above. Even in the time-shortened state, the fluctuation time is the same as in the probable change state except for the final fluctuation. There is no distinction between the final fluctuation and the final fluctuation regarding the fluctuation time of the probabilistic state. Others are the same as in FIG. 137 (B). It should be noted that the fluctuation time may be different between the time saving state and the probable change state.

[Screen transition diagram (modification example)]
FIG. 150 is a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition of the display device 41 when the time saving state (time saving mode) is changed to the normal mode through the special mode in the modified example of the third embodiment. Except that (a') is the time saving mode and (i') is the end of the final fluctuation in the time saving state, (u) to (ki) are the same as in FIG. 38, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the modified example of the third embodiment, in the normal gaming state after the end of the time saving state, until all the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 start memory generated during the time saving state is completed. You can set a special mode. Further, during the special mode according to the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (for example, four times after the probability change state ends), the special figure based on the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) generated during the time saving state. 2 By setting a short-time fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation display game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of unmanned jackpots.

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment and its modification, the gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed on a display device based on the establishment of a start condition, and is variable. When the result of the display game is a special result, it is possible to generate a special game state in which the player can be given a game value. The game control means (game control device 100) is a first control means (special figure 1 game process) that controls execution of a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition. And a second control means (special figure 2 game processing) for controlling execution of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition. It is possible to set both the first variable display game by the first control means and the second variable display game by the second control means in the running state. The first control means can set the fluctuation pattern of the first variable display game according to the number of executions of the first variable display game, and the second control means has the second according to the number of executions of the second variable display game. Fluctuation display It is possible to set the fluctuation pattern of the game.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a specific mode (special mode) according to the number of executions of one variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) (for example, four times after the end of the probability variation mode or after the time saving mode). ) Is one of the variable display games (for example, special figure) based on the start memory (for example, special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) that occurred before entering a specific mode (for example, in the probabilistic mode or the time saving mode). 2 It is possible to set a short-time fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation display game). This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a special gaming state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state. If the fluctuation patterns of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game are set according to the total number of executions of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game, such a specific mode (special mode) is set. For only one variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on the start memory (for example, special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) that occurred before entering (for example, during the probability change mode or the time saving mode). , It becomes difficult to set a short-time fluctuation pattern during a specific mode.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, the game control means (game control device 100) has a specific game state (for example, a probability change state, a small hit RUSH state, a time saving state) different from the special game state, and a specific game state after the specific game state. It is possible to generate a normal game state. The second control means sets a long-time fluctuation pattern for the second fluctuation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the normal gaming state. When the second variation display game is executed in the normal gaming state, the second control means performs a short-time variation pattern with respect to the second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific gaming state. Set.

According to such a gaming machine 10, during a specific mode (special mode) according to the number of executions of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (for example, four times after the end of the specific gaming state). , Set a short-time variation pattern for the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the start memory (for example, special figure 2 start memory, second start memory) generated during the specific gaming state. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a special gaming state (big hit) will occur in an unmanned state in the normal gaming state after the specific gaming state.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect related to the variable display game is provided. The first control means can set the first effect mode (special figure 1 effect mode) according to the number of times the first variation display game is executed, and the variation pattern of the first variation display game is set according to the first effect mode. Set. The second control means can set the second effect mode (special figure 2 effect mode) according to the number of times the second variation display game is executed, and sets the variation pattern of the second variation display game according to the second effect mode. Set. In the effect control means (effect control device 300), the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition in the specific game state (for example, the probability variation state, the small hit RUSH state, the time saving state) is executed in the normal game state. In this case, the effect corresponding to the second effect mode is prioritized (preferred) over the first effect mode.

According to such a game machine 10, even if the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is the main variable display game in the normal gaming state, the second starting condition based on the establishment of the second starting condition in the specific gaming state is established. 2 When the variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed in the normal gaming state, the second effect mode (special figure 2 effect mode) related to the second variable display game is prioritized (preferentially executed). Because it stands out, it does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the third embodiment and its modification, the game control means (game control device 100) changes the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state) after the end of the special game state to the first change in the game state. It is controlled according to the total number of executions of the display game and the second variable display game (that is, the total number of executions of the first variable display game and the second variable display game).

According to such a gaming machine 10, there is no problem that the gaming state does not shift (change) when only one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, at least one of the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (specific gaming state (probability change state or time saving state)) can be generated after the end of the special gaming state. Is. The game control means controls the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening 36), and the second start. The execution control of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is performed based on the establishment of the condition (for example, winning the second starting winning opening 37 or the normal variable winning device 33). The game control means can be in a state in which both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are being executed. In the first game state (for example, the normal game state), the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a first effect (decorative special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 hold display 620a, etc.) related to the first variable display game. ) Is prioritized (preferred) and can be executed, and in the second game state (specific game state), the second effect related to the second variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game, special figure 2 hold display 630a). Etc.) can be prioritized (preferred). The effect control means can execute the second effect related to the second variable display game with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect even in the first game state under predetermined conditions. The predetermined conditions include a special mode and a case where the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) becomes a big hit.

According to such a gaming machine 10, even in the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the second variable display game is frequently executed (special mode), and the second variable display game becomes a big hit, which is important. If so, the second effect related to the second variable display game can be executed with priority (preferential treatment) over the first effect. Therefore, the production can be flexibly executed, and the deterioration of the interest of the game is suppressed.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. It is also possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Gaming machine 30 Gaming board 32 Gaming area 33 Ordinary variable winning device (Public winning slot)
36 1st start winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 2nd start winning opening (2nd starting winning area)
38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 100 Game control device (main board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed on a display device based on the establishment of a start condition is provided, and a game value can be given to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state
The game control means is
A first control means for controlling the execution of the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition,
A second control means for controlling the execution of the second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition is provided.
It is possible to put both the first variation display game by the first control means and the second variation display game by the second control means in the running state.
After the special gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first starting condition can be generated, and after the second gaming state. The first gaming state can be generated,
In the first game state, the first control means can set the effect mode of the first variable display game according to the number of executions of the first variable display game after the transition to the first game state.
The second control means, in the first game condition, Ri the configurable der the effect mode of the second variable display game in accordance with the execution frequency of the second variable display game after the transition to the first gaming state ,
In the first gaming state, when the number of executions of the second variable display game after shifting to the first gaming state exceeds a predetermined number of times, the variable time of the second variable display game is set to a predetermined time. when number of times of execution of the second variable display game after the transition to the first game condition is within the predetermined number of times, that you set the variable time of the second variable display games in a short fluctuation time than the predetermined time A game machine featuring.

Images